The Lighting Handbook
Your concise reference book – always ready to hand.
Chapter 1
Lighting technology and lighting application Chapter 2
Standard values for indoor and outdoor lighting Based on the new European standards Chapter 3
Products Chapter 4
Lamps and ballasts Chapter 5
Lighting and room management Chapter 6
Quickplan – calculating the n° of lum. required Chapter 7
Technical information Chapter 8
Checklists Chapter 9
Services Chapter 10
Notes
Imprint: For questions and suggestions on the “The Lighting Handbook�:
2nd edition, revised and updated, December 2008
The Lighting Handbook
Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Schweizer Strasse 30 Postfach 72 6851 Dornbirn, AUSTRIA T +43/(0)5572/390-0 F +43/(0)5572/22 826
Chapter 1
Lighting technology and lighting application What is light? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–3
Basic parameters used in lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminous flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminous intensity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traditional quality characteristics of lighting . . . . . . . . The right light – traditional and new quality criteria . Illuminance – definition of terminology . . . . . . . . . . Glare – glare limitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colour rendition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Humanergy Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comprehensive assessment of lighting quality (ELI) . . . Visual performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vitality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Empowerment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation of energy efficiency (LENI) . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–5 4 5 5 5 6–8 6 6–7 7 8 8 9 10 – 11 12 – 13 14 – 15 16 16 – 18 17 17 17 18 18 19
What is light? Light is that part of the electromagnetic spectrum that is perceived by our eyes.
What is light?
What does the human eye see?
Wavelength [m] 10-10
Gamma rays
Relative spectral brightness perception
X-rays
1.0
Ultraviolet
0.8
Visible light
Night
Day
0.6
-5
10
0.4 Infrared Microwaves
100
Television, VSW Medium wave
105
0.2 350 450 550 650 750 Wavelength [nm] Wavelength [m]
Radio waves
The Lighting Handbook
By day we see in colour, while at night we can only see in shades of grey.
Light has a triple effect: – Light for visual functions – llumination of task area in conformity with relevant standards – glare-free and convenient – Light creating biological effects – Supporting people’s biological rhythms – Stimulating and motivating
The Lighting Handbook
– Light for emotional perception – Pleasant lighting enhancing the interior design – Makes people relax and feel at ease
Chapter 1 / 3
Basic parameters used in lighting Luminous flux – Luminous intensity – Illuminance – Luminance
Luminous flux q
I=
q
E=
q
Lumen [lm] Luminous intensity I
Illuminance E
Candela [lm/sr]=[cd]
Lux [lm/m2]=[lx] Luminance L L=
L=
[lm/(sr*m2)]=[cd/m2]
Luminous flux The luminous flux describes the quantity of light emitted by a light source. The luminous efficiency is the ratio of the luminous flux to the electrical power consumed (lm/W). It is a measure of a lamp’s economic efficiency.
4 / Chapter 1
Abbreviation: Unit:
q lm
Phi Lumen
The Lighting Handbook
solid angle into which luminous flux is emitted area hit by luminous flux visible areas of light source reflectance of area 3.14 for diffuse surface areas
Luminous intensity The luminous intensity describes the quantity of light that is radiated in a particular direction. This is a useful measurement for directive lighting elements such as reflectors. It is represented by the luminous intensity distribution curve (LDC).
Abbreviation: Unit:
P cd
Candela
Illuminance Illuminance describes the quantity of luminous flux falling on a surface. It decreases by the square of the distance (inverse square law). Relevant standards specify the required illuminance (e.g. EN 12464 “Lighting of indoor workplaces�).
Abbreviation: Unit:
E lx
Lux
Abbreviation: Unit:
L cd/m2
Illuminance: (lm) E(lx) = luminous flux 2 area (m )
The Lighting Handbook
Luminance Luminance is the only basic lighting parameter that is perceived by the eye. It specifies the brightness of a surface and is essentially dependent on its reflectance (finish and colour).
Chapter 1 / 5
Traditional quality characteristics of lighting The right light – traditional and new quality criteria T R A D I T I O N A L
N E W
Harmonious brightness distribution Sufficient illumination level
Glare limitation Avoidance of reflections
Good modelling Correct light colour Appropriate colour rendition
Quality criteria Changing lighting situations
Energy efficiency Daylight integration
Personal control
Light as an interior design element
Illuminance – definition of terminology Each term corresponds to the new European standards (see Chapter 2 / 2). Illuminance maintenance value E m: value that the illuminance level must not fall below in the visual task area. Visual task area: illuminance levels are specified for specific visual tasks and are designed for the area in which these may take place. If the precise location is not known, then the whole room or a specific working area is used to define it. The visual task area may be a horizontal, vertical or inclined plane.
Maintenance factor: the initial value multiplied by the maintenance factor gives the illuminance maintenance value. The maintenance factor accounts for the reduction in luminous flux from lamps, luminaires and room surfaces in the installation, and can be determined on a case-by-case basis. The maintenance schedule (the cleaning and maintenance intervals for the lamps and installation) must be documented. See also Chapter 8 / 22 on “Economic efficiency calculation”.
6 / Chapter 1
The Lighting Handbook
Area immediately surrounding the visual task area: here illuminance may be one level lower than in the visual task area (e.g. 300 lx to 500 lx).
Relative illuminance (%) initial value
150 125 100
maintenance value
75 50 25
operating time Maintenance value = maintenance factor x initial value Glare – glare limitation
– luminaires with limited luminance levels – blinds
cause
The Lighting Handbook
– loss of concentration – more frequent mistakes – fatigue
– reflective surfaces – incorrect luminaire arrangement – incorrect workstation position
effect
– luminaires without glare control – very bright surfaces
Reflected glare
– loss of concentration – more frequent mistakes – fatigue
remedy
Direct glare
– matching luminaire to workstation (layout) – indirect lighting – matt surfaces
Chapter 1 / 7
Light colour The light colour describes the colour appearance of the light. Colour temperature Appearance
Association
ww
up to 3,300 K
reddish
warm
nw
3,300 K – 5,300 K
white
intermediate
tw
above 5,300 K
blue-ish
cool
Ww = warm white, nw = intermediate, tw = cool white
The light colour sets the underlying mood of the room! Colour rendition Colour rendition index Ra ≥ 90 80–89 70–79 60–69 40–59 20–39 Daylight Incandescent lamp Compact fluorescent lamp Fluorescent lamp Mercury vapour highpressure lamp Metal halide lamp Sodium vapour highpressure lamp
Application examples (minimum requirements for Ra): Ra ≥ 90: colour inspection Ra 80 – 89: offices Ra 70 – 79: electronics industry
Ra 60–69: assembly work Ra 40–59: fabrication shop Ra 20–39: warehouses
Display format on fluorescent lamps Example 840: 8
40
Ra ≥ 80
8 / Chapter 1
The Lighting Handbook
Colour temperature 4,000 K (nw)
Measuring illuminance Mean illuminance is the arithmetic mean of the point brilliance levels measured with a luxmeter in a defined grid, under precisely specified conditions. Measuring instruments: description and precision – L: maximum precision, tolerance 3% – A: high precision, tolerance 5% – B: average precision; tolerance 10% (minimum requirement) Measuring conditions – avoid external light/daylight (measure separately and subtract) – check mains voltage and ambient temperature – use new, burnt-in lamps (discharge lamps 100 h) Measuring grid and measuring level – workplaces = 0.75 m; sports facilities (floor) = 0.03 m – circulation areas, stairs, car parks (floor) = 0.03 m – cylindrical illuminance = 1.2 m – measuring grid: congruent triangles; approx. 1 m distance – measuring grid not congruent with arrangement grid
The Lighting Handbook
Size of measuring field 1m 5m 10 m 50 m 100 m
Grid element spacing 0.2 m 0.5 m 1.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
Chapter 1 / 9
Lighting technology Under the new European standard for interior workplace lighting, EN 12464, (psychological) glare is assessed by the unified glare rating method (UGR), which is based on a formula for glare. It takes account of all the luminaires in a system contributing to the sensation of glare. UGR tables derived from this formula are provided by the manufacturers for glare rating. The Quickplan tables in Chapter 6 and the lighting catalogues contain reference values for specific room sizes.
(
UGR = 8 log 0.25 Lb (1)
LP 2
2
(2)
)
The UGR method takes account of all the luminaires in the system that contribute to the glare sensation (2) as well as the brightness of walls and ceilings (1). It produces a UGR index. The two methods – the one set out in DIN 5035 and the one defined in EN 12464 – produce comparable results.
≤ 16 ≤ 19 ≤ 22 ≤ 25 ≤ 28
Technical drawing Reading, writing, training, meetings, computer-based work Craft and light industries Heavy industry Railway platforms, foyers
10 / Chapter 1
The Lighting Handbook
UGR limits (UGRL), that must not be exceeded:
3 4
1
a hs 2
8 6 4 3
45°
55°
65°
= 85°
75°
8 103
2
3 4 5 6 8 104 2 Luminance L in cd/m2
A 85°
Quality class for nominal illuminance (lx) 1000 750 500 <300 A 1 2000 1500 1000 750 500 <300 2 2000 1000 500 <300 3 2000 1000 500 <300
28 25 22 19 16 13 UGRL = 45° The Lighting Handbook
The previously used luminance limiting curve method defined in DIN 5035 assesses the mean luminance of the luminaires across a beam angle of 45° to 85°. The new European standard sets UGR = 19 as the maximum permissible value for offices, which is equivalent to the luminance limiting curve for 500 lx in Quality class 1. Chapter 1 / 11
Types of lighting
Direct lighting: – highly directional – strong glare reduction at certain angles – dark ceiling (cave effect) – limited flexibility of workstation layout – energy-efficient
– diffuse lighting conditions – room gains in height – glare-free – workstations can be positioned anywhere – low energy efficiency
12 / Chapter 1
The Lighting Handbook
Indirect lighting:
Indirect/direct lighting: – pleasant room impression – high user acceptance – good contrast ratios – flexible workstation layout (indirect component > 60 %)
The Lighting Handbook
Mellow Light: – indirect/direct solution for low ceiling heights – workstations can be positioned anywhere – glare-free – reduced luminance levels at all viewing angles – gives impression of daylight in room
Chapter 1 / 13
Lighting concepts The definition of individual visual tasks for the purpose of lighting design in a room, as provided for in the EN 12464 standard, opens up new perspectives for lighting design. The quantity and quality of light can now be specified exactly for any task area (see Chapter 2 / 2). TASK AREA lighting concepts are a customised tool to fully exploit the additional options provided. At the same time they offer financial scope that can be used to improve lighting comfort and enhance the room effect.
Visual function TASK AREA lighting concepts provide the right quantity of light of the best possible quality for every visual task. Uniformity, control of glare and reflections, good contrast rendition and shadow detail are consistently matched to the respective task. The lighting is not based on the room but perfectly adjusted to peopleâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s needs. Emotional and biological effects Focusing the lighting onto clearly defined areas means saving investment and operating costs. The funds saved can be used to improve comfort and enhance the room atmosphere, for instance by exciting lighting accents, illuminated walls or dynamic lighting scenarios.
14 / Chapter 1
The Lighting Handbook
Optimum energy efficiency Large buildings provide huge potential for optimisation of energy consumption. Lighting that is consistently focussed onto individual task areas reduces mean illuminance levels and therefore the average expenditure on energy. Savings can be further increased by using daylight-based lighting management and presence detectors.
The Lighting Handbook
Room-related lighting concepts take neither individual task areas nor different visual tasks into account. They are based on the most demanding task performed in the room. The position of the workstation is not defined, the entire room disposes of a uniform lighting quality.
Lighting focussed onto individual visual task areas provides for varied light design in the room. By illuminating walls, for instance, rooms can be designed to be much more open and attractive; dynamic lighting situations can enhance their visual quality.
Chapter 1 / 15
Humanergy Balance Human aspects + energy efficiency = Humanergy Balance The Humanergy Balance concept harmonises both aspects of lighting and makes it possible to assess them: ELI, the lighting quality indicator, takes their physical and psychological effects on people into account; LENI, the energy efficiency indicator, assesses the economic and ecological aspects of light.
Comprehensive assessment of lighting quality (ELI) The Ergonomic Lighting Indicator (ELI) allows to assess lighting quality in terms of quantity, using five descriptive quality criteria. Checklists are used to record the individual criteria, which are displayed in a Kiviat graph (spider chart). The outermost line in the graph indicates optimum fulfilment of a criterion.
Visual performance
A
B
E
Vista
Empowerment
D Vitality
C Visual comfort
16 / Chapter 1
The Lighting Handbook
Example of ELI assessment using a spider chart.
Visual performance Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that a visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance. – Lighting level – Uniformity of illuminance – Colour rendition – Avoiding hard shadows – Contrast rendition – Physiological glare Vista In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and make people accept the interior on account of the first visual impression they get. – Architectural design – Mental design – Guidance – Hierarchy of perception – External appearance – Material – Luminaires’ protection type – Protection against harmful radiation
The Lighting Handbook
Visual comfort Light is not only needed in the visual task area, but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance. – Balanced brightness distribution – Varying luminance levels – Plasticity/modelling – Discomfort glare – Uniform illuminance in area around visual task – Sense of security – Artificial light complemented by daylight – Use of flicker-free ballasts
Chapter 1 / 17
Vitality Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of wellbeing. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes. – Sense of well-being – Activation and stimulation – Circadian rhythm – Lighting similar to daylight – Avoiding danger spots – Avoiding thermal radiation – Electromagnetic fields Empowerment Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence one’s lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs. – Individual influence by switching and dimming – Choice of lighting scene – Presence detection – Daylight-based control – Choice of lighting scenarios – Flexibility for layout changes – Privacy
18 / Chapter 1
The Lighting Handbook
Use of the charts is described in Chapter 8 / 3–10 “Checklists”.
Calculation of energy efficiency (LENI) The Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI) stands for a lighting installation’s actual energy consumption in kWh per square metre and year. LENI is calculated according to the normative specifications of the EN 15193 standard. Formula for calculating a lighting installation’s energy consumption:
{-(Pn x FC) x {(tD x FO x FD) + (tN x FO)} kWh/(year x m2) A Without elaborating on individual parameters in greater detail, the following relevant factors are identified: LENI =
– the installed load (Pn) – multiplied by the annual hours of use by day (tD) and at night (tN) – reduced by factors ( 1) for daylight-based control (FD), presence-based control (FO) and use of a lighting control system (FC) – the area assessed (A) LENI also takes charging energy for emergency lighting and standby energy into account. The following factors have a positive impact on the reduction of energy consumption: – Sensible control of lighting – Use of daylight – Use of presence detectors – Intelligent consideration of hours of use – Energy-efficient lamps – Need-based use of luminaires and lighting solutions, specified for the respective application – Constant lighting control (maintenance control)
The Lighting Handbook
60
120
0
180
Energy consumption in kWh/(m year) 2
Chapter 1 / 19
Chapter 2
Standard values for indoor and outdoor lighting Standard values for lighting of indoor and outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting . . . . . . .
2
Indoor workplaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings . . . . Industrial activities and crafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retail premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Places of public assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Educational premises. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Health care premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transportational areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sports facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor workplaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General circulation areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel filling service stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial sites and storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Petrochemical and other hazardous industries. . . . . . Power, electricity, gas and heat plants . . . . . . . . . . . Railway and tramways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saw mills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 – 12 3 3–7 7 8 8 8–9 9 – 10 11 11 – 12 13 – 15 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 – 15 15
Standard values for lighting of indoor and outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting E m gives the illuminance maintenance values specified in the European standards which partially or completely replace national standards (e.g. DIN 5035, Austrian standard O 1040, Swiss lighting standard SLG 8912, DIN 67526). “Lighting of indoor workplaces”, EN 12464-1 (April 2003) “Lighting of outdoorwork places”, EN 12464-2 (October 2007) “Sports facility lighting”, EN 12193 (April 2008) (see also “Definition of terminology”, Chapter 1 / 6) Illuminance levels must not fall below the E m maintenance values in the visual task area. If the precise location is not known, the limit should be applied to the whole room or a specific working area. Example for an office task area:
task height = 0.75 m
use
r flo
area
or-a
rea
1.00 m The maintenance factors can be determined on a case-by-case basis from the manufacturer’s data (see also Chapter 8). The maintenance factors and schedules for Zumtobel luminaires are given in the Quickplan tables (Chapter 6).
Where no individual maintenance data is available, the following values are recommended as reference maintenance factors for modern technology and three-yearly maintenance: 0.67 in a clean atmosphere, and 0.50 in very dirty environments.
UGRL is the upper limit for direct glare. The UGR value calculated in the design process must lie below this (the Quickplan tables give the UGR figure for the luminaire used in a medium-size reference room). Ra is the lower limit for the colour rendition index. The Ra of the selected lamp must be equal to or greater than this value.
The Lighting Handbook
EN 12464 specifies that the lighting designer must document the maintenance factor and maintenance schedule.
Type of interior, task or activity
Em
UGRL
Ra
Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings Traffic zones • Circulation areas and corridors • Stairs, escalators, travolators • Loading ramps/bays Rest, sanitation and first aid rooms • Canteens, pantries • Rest rooms • Rooms for physical exercise • Cloakrooms, washrooms, bathrooms, toilets • Sick bay • Rooms for medical attention Control rooms • Plant rooms, switch gear rooms • Telex, post room, switchboard Store rooms, cold stores • Store and stockrooms • Dispatch packing handling areas Storage rack areas • Gangways: unmanned • Gangways: manned • Control stations
100 150 150
28 25 25
40 40 40
200 100 300 200 500 500
22 22 22 25 19 16
80 80 80 80 80 90
200 500
25 19
60 80
100 300
25 25
60 60
20 150 150
– 22 22
40 60 60
200 50 200 200
25 – 25 25
80 40 80 80
300 500
22 22
80 80
50
28
20
200 300 300
28 25 25
40 80 80
50 300
28 25
20 80
300
25
80
750
19
80
The Lighting Handbook
Industrial activities and crafts Agriculture • Loading and operating of goods, handling equipment and machinery • Buildings for livestock • Sick animal pens; calving stalls • Feed preparation; dairy; utensil washing Bakeries • Preparation and baking • Finishing, glazing, decorating Cement, cement goods, concrete, bricks • Drying • Preparation of materials; work on kilns and mixers • General machine work • Rough forms Ceramics, tiles, glass, glassware • Drying • Preparation, general machine work • Enamelling, rolling, pressing, shaping simple parts, glazing, glass blowing • Grinding, engraving, glass polishing, shaping precision parts, manufacture of glass instruments
Chapter 2 / 3
• Grinding of optical glass, crystal, hand grinding and engraving • Precision work e.g. decorative grinding, hand painting • Manufacture of synthetic precious stones Chemical, plastics and rubber industry • Remote-operated processing installations • Processing installations with limited manual intervention • Constantly manned work places in processing installations • Precision measuring rooms, laboratories • Pharmaceutical production • Tyre production • Colour inspection • Cutting, finishing, inspection Electrical industry • Cable and wire manufacture • Winding: – large coils – medium-sized coils – small coils • Coil impregnating • Galvanising • Assembly work: – rough e.g. large transformers – medium e.g. switchboards – fine e.g. telephones – precision e.g. measuring equipment • Electronic workshops, testing, adjusting Food stuffs and luxury food industry • Work places and zones in – breweries, malting floor – for washing, barrel filling, cleaning, sieving, peeling – cooking in preserve and chocolate factories – work places and zones in sugar factories – for drying and fermenting raw tobacco, fermentation cellar • Sorting and washing of products, milling, mixing, packing • Work places and critical zones in slaughter houses, butchers, dairies mills, on filtering floor in sugar refineries • Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables • Manufacture of delicatessen foods, kitchen work, manufacture of cigars and cigarettes
4 / Chapter 2
Em
UGRL
Ra
750
16
80
1000 1500
16 16
90 90
50
–
20
150
28
40
300 500 500 500 1000 750
25 19 22 22 16 19
80 80 80 80 90 80
300
25
80
300 500 750 300 300
25 22 19 25 25
80 80 80 80 80
300 500 750 1000 1500
25 22 19 16 16
80 80 80 80 80
200
25
80
300
25
80
500 300
25 25
80 80
500
22
80
The Lighting Handbook
Type of interior, task or activity
The Lighting Handbook
Type of interior, task or activity • Inspection of glasses and bottles, product control, trimming, sorting, decoration • Laboratories • Colour inspection Foundries and metal casting • Man-size underfloor tunnels, cellars, etc. • Platforms • Sand preparation • Dressing room • Work places at cupola and mixer • Casting bay • Shake out areas • Machine moulding • Hand and core moulding • Die casting • Model building Hairdressers • Hairdressing Jewellery manufacturing • Working with precious stones • Manufacture of jewellery • Watch making (manual) • Watch making (automatic) Laundries and dry cleaning • Goods in, marking and sorting • Washing and dry cleaning • Ironing, pressing • Inspection and repairs Leather and leather goods • Work on vats, barrels, pits • Fleshing, skiving, rubbing, tumbling of skins • Saddlery work, shoe manufacture: stitching, sewing, polishing, shaping, cutting, punching • Sorting • Leather dyeing (machine) • Quality control • Colour inspection • Shoe making • Glove making Metal working and processing • Open die forging • Drop forging • Welding • Rough and average machining: tolerances ≥ 0.1 mm • Precision machining; grinding: tolerances < 0.1 mm • Scribing; inspection
UGRL
Ra
500 500 1000
22 19 16
80 80 90
50 100 200 200 200 200 200 200 300 300 500
– 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 22
20 40 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
500
19
90
1500 1000 1500 500
16 16 16 19
90 90 80 80
300 300 300 750
25 25 25 19
80 80 80 80
200 300
25 25
40 80
500 500 500 1000 1000 500 500
22 22 22 19 16 22 22
80 90 80 80 90 80 80
200 300 300
25 25 25
60 60 60
300
22
60
500 750
19 19
60 60
Em
Chapter 2 / 5
Em
• Wire and pipe drawing shops; cold forming 300 • Plate machining: thickness ≥ 5 mm 200 • Sheet metalwork: thickness < 5 mm 300 • Tool making; cutting equipment manufacture 750 • Assembly: – rough 200 – medium 300 – fine 500 – precision 750 • Galvanising 300 • Surface preparation and painting 750 • Tool, template and jig making, precision mechanics, micromechanics 1000 Paper and paper goods • Edge runners, pulp mills 200 • Paper manufacture and processing, paper and corrugating machines, cardboard manufacture 300 • Standard bookbinding work, e.g. folding, sorting, gluing, cutting, embossing, sewing 500 Power stations • Fuel supply plant 50 • Boiler house 100 • Machine halls 200 • Side rooms, e.g. pump rooms, condenser rooms etc.; switchboards (inside buildings) 200 • Control rooms 500 • Outdoor switch gear 20 Printers • Cutting, gilding, embossing, block engraving, work on stones and platens, printing machines, matrix making 500 • Paper sorting and hand printing 500 • Type setting, retouching, lithography 1000 • Colour inspection in multicoloured printing 1500 • Steel and copper engraving 2000 Rolling mills, iron and steel works • Production plants without manual operation 50 • Production plants with occasional manual operation 150 • Production plants with continuous manual operation 200 • Slab Store 50 • Furnaces 200 • Mill train; coiler; shear line 300 • Control platforms; control panels 300 • Test, measurement and inspection 500 • Underfloor man-sized tunnels; belt sections; cellars etc. 50
6 / Chapter 2
UGRL
Ra
25 25 22 19
60 60 60 60
25 25 22 19 25 25
80 80 80 80 80 80
19
80
25
80
25
80
22
80
– 28 25
20 40 80
25 16 –
60 80 20
19 19 19 16 16
80 80 80 90 80
–
20
28
40
25 – 25 25 22 22
80 20 20 40 80 80
–
20
The Lighting Handbook
Type of interior, task or activity
Type of interior, task or activity
Em
Textile manufacture and processing • Work places and zones in baths, bale opening 200 • Carding, washing, ironing, devilling machine work, drawing, combing, sizing, card cutting, pre-spinning, jute and hemp spinning 300 • Spinning, plying, reeling, winding 500 • Warping, weaving, braiding, knitting 500 • Sewing, fine knitting, taking up stitches 750 • Manual design, drawing patterns 750 • Finishing, dyeing 500 • Drying room 100 • Automatic fabric printing 500 • Burling, picking, trimming 1000 • Colour inspection; fabric control 1000 • Invisible mending 1500 • Hat manufacturing 500 Vehicle construction • Body work and assembly 500 • Painting, spraying chamber, polishing chamber 750 • Painting: touch-up, inspection 1000 • Upholstery manufacture (manned) 1000 • Final inspection 1000 Wood working and processing • Automatic processing e.g. drying, plywood manufacturing 50 • Steam pits 150 • Saw frame 300 • Work at joiner’s bench, gluing, assembly 300 • Polishing, painting, fancy joinery 750 • Work on wood working machines e.g. turning, fluting, dressing, rebating, grooving, cutting, sawing, sinking 500 • Selection of veneer woods 750 • Marquetry, inlay work 750 • Quality control, inspection 1000
UGRL
Ra
25
60
22 22 22 22 22 22 28 25 19 16 19 22
80 80 80 80 90 80 60 80 80 90 90 80
22 22 19 19 19
80 80 90 80 80
28 28 25 25 22
40 40 60 80 80
19 22 22 19
80 90 90 90
19 19 16 19 19 22 25
80 80 80 80 80 80 80
The Lighting Handbook
Offices Offices • Filing, copying, etc. • Writing, typing, reading, data processing • Technical drawing • CAD work stations • Conference and meeting rooms • Reception desk • Archives
300 500 750 500 500 300 200
Chapter 2 / 7
Type of interior, task or activity
Em
UGRL
Ra
300 500 500
22 19 19
80 80 80
100 200 200 300
22 25 22 22
80 80 80 80
300 500 – 200 300 500 100
22 22 – 22 22 19 25
80 80 80 80 80 80 80
300
22
80
300
22
80
Retail premises Retail premises • Sales area • Till area • Wrapper table
Places of public assembly General areas • Entrance halls • Cloakrooms • Lounges • Ticket offices Restaurants and hotels • Reception/cashier desk, porters desk • Kitchen • Restaurant, dining room, function room • Self-service restaurant • Buffet • Conference rooms • Corridors Theatres, concert halls, cinemas • Practice rooms, dressing rooms Trade fairs, exhibition halls • General lighting Museums • Exhibits, insensitive to light • Light sensitive exhibits Libraries • Bookshelves • Reading area • Counters Public car parks (indoor) • In/out ramps (during the day) • In/out ramps (at night) • Traffic lanes • Parking areas • Ticket office
according to requirements 200 500 500
19 19 19
80 80 80
300 75 75 75 300
25 25 25 – 19
20 20 20 20 80
300 300 300
19 19 19
80 80 80
300
19
80
500
19
80
Nursery school, play school • Play room • Nursery • Handicraft room Educational buildings • Classrooms, tutorial rooms • Classroom for evening classes and adults education
8 / Chapter 2
The Lighting Handbook
Educational premises
Type of interior, task or activity • Lecture hall • Black board • Demonstration table • Art rooms • Art rooms in art schools • Technical drawing rooms • Practical rooms and laboratories • Handicraft rooms • Teaching workshop • Music practice rooms • Computer practice rooms (menu driven) • Language laboratory • Preparation rooms and workshops • Entrance halls • Circulation areas, corridors • Stairs • Student common rooms and assembly halls • Teachers rooms • Library: bookshelves • Library: reading areas • Stock rooms for teaching materials • Sports halls, gymnasiums, swimming pools (general use) • School canteens • Kitchen
Em
UGRL
Ra
500 500 500 500 750 750 500 500 500 300 300 300 500 200 100 150 200 300 200 500 100
19 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 19 19 22 22 25 25 22 19 19 19 25
80 80 80 80 90 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
300 200 500
22 22 22
80 80 80
200 200 50 200
22 22 22 22
80 80 80 80
500 300
19 19
80 80
100 300 300 1000 5 200
19 19 19 19 – 22
80 80 80 90 80 80
500 1000
19 19
90 90
300 1000
19 –
80 90
The Lighting Handbook
Health care premises Rooms for general use • Waiting rooms • Corridors: during the day • Corridors: during the night • Day rooms Staff rooms • Staff office • Staff rooms Wards, maternity wards • General lighting • Reading lighting • Simple examinations • Examination and treatment • Night lighting, observation lighting • Bathrooms and toilets for patients Examination rooms (general) • General lighting • Examination and treatment Eye examination rooms • General lighting • Examination of the outer eye
Chapter 2 / 9
• Reading and colour vision tests with vision charts Ear examination rooms • General lighting • Ear examination Scanner rooms • General lighting • Scanners with image enhancers and television systems Delivery rooms • General lighting • Examination and treatment Treatment rooms (general) • Dialysis • Dermatology • Endoscopy rooms • Plaster rooms • Medical baths • Massage and radiotherapy Operating areas • Pre-op and recovery rooms • Operating theatre • Operating cavity Intensive care unit • General lighting • Simple examinations • Examination and treatment • Night watch Dentists • General lighting • At the patient • Operating cavity • White teeth matching Laboratories and pharmacies • General lighting • Colour inspection Decontamination rooms • Sterilisation rooms • Disinfection rooms Autopsy rooms and mortuaries • General lighting • Autopsy table and dissecting table
10 / Chapter 2
Em
UGRL
Ra
500
16
90
300 1000
19 –
80 90
300
19
80
50
19
80
300 1000
19 19
80 80
500 500 300 500 300 300
19 19 19 19 19 19
80 90 80 80 80 80
500 1000
19 19
90 90
100 300 1000 20
19 19 19 19
90 90 90 90
500 1000 5000 5000
19 – – –
90 90 90 90
500 1000
19 19
80 90
300 300
22 22
80 80
500 5000
19 –
90 90 The Lighting Handbook
Type of interior, task or activity
Type of interior, task or activity
Em
UGRL
Ra
200 150 500 500 200 200 300 500 500 500 500
22 22 19 19 22 25 19 16 22 22 22
80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
50 200 300 200
28 28 19 22
40 40 80 80
Transportational areas Airports • Arrival and departure halls, baggage claim areas • Connecting areas, escalators, travolators • Information desks, check-in desks • Customs and passport control desks • Waiting areas • Luggage store rooms • Security check areas • Air traffic control tower • Testing and repair hangars • Engine test areas • Measuring areas in hangars Railway installations • Covered platforms and passenger subways (underpasses) • Ticket hall and concourse • Ticket and luggage offices and counters • Waiting rooms
The Lighting Handbook
Sports facilities The following details apply to competition class I (lower requirements apply to classes II and III) Em and Ra data according to European Standard EN 12193 General school sports data from EN 12464 An Ra level of 80 should be preferred For lighting for training purposes, usually an UGRL level of 22 should be observed • Aerobics 500 • Archery 200 • Athletics (all disciplines) 500 • Badminton 750 • Basketball 750 • Billards 750 • Boccia 300 • Boules 300 • Bowling 200 • Bowls 500 • Boxing (competition/training) 2000/300 • Climbing 500 • Cricket 750 • Cricket nets 1500 • Curling (target/playing area) 300/200 • Cycling 750 • Dancing (fitness) 500 • Darts 200
60 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Chapter 2 / 11
Em
Ra
• Fencing • Football (indoor) • Gymnastics • Handball • Hockey • Ice hockey • Ice skating • Judo • Kendo/Karate • Netball • Petanque • Racketball • Riding • Roller skating • School sports • Shooting • Snooker • Speed skating • Squash • Swimming • Swimmung (school level) • Table tennis • Tennis • Volleyball • Weight lifting • Wrestling
750 750 500 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 300 750 500 500 750 200 750 500 750 300 500 750 750 750 750 750
60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 60 60
12 / Chapter 2
The Lighting Handbook
Type of interior, task or activity
Type of area, task or activity
Em
UGRL
Ra
General circulation areas at outdoor workplaces • Walkways exclusively for pedestrians • Traffic areas for slowly moving vehicles max. (10 km/h), e.g. bicycles, trucks and excavators • Regular vehicle traffic (max. 40 km/h) • Pedestrian passages, vehicle turning, loading and unloading points
5
20
10 20
20 20
50
20
20 30 50 50 200
20 40 40 40 60
20
20
50
20
100
40
200
40
5
20
20 50
20 20
150 150
20 20
20
20
50
20
100
20
200
60
Airports • Hangar apron • Terminal apron • Loading areas • Fuel depot • Aircraft maintenance stands
Building sites • Clearance, excavation and loading • Construction areas, drain pipes mounting, transport, auxiliary and storage tasks • Framework element mounting, light reinforcement work, wooden mould and framework mounting, electric piping and cabling • Element jointing, demanding electrical, machine and pipe mountings
Fuel filling stations • Vehicle parking and storage areas • Entry and exit driveways: dark environment (i.e. rural areas and suburbs) • Entry and exit driveways: light environment (i.e. cities) • Air pressure and water checking points and other service areas • Meter reading area
The Lighting Handbook
Industrial sites and storage areas • Short term handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of solid bulk goods • Continuous handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of freight, lifting and descending location for cranes, open loading platforms • Reading of addresses, covered loading platforms, use of tools, ordinary reinforcement and casting tasks in concrete plants • Demanding electrical, machine and piping installations, inspection
Chapter 2 / 13
Type of area, task or activity
Em
Ra
Parking areas • Light traffic, e.g. parking areas of shops, terraced and apartment houses; cycle parks • Medium traffic, e.g. parking areas of department stores, office buildings, plants, sports and multipurpose building complexes • Heavy traffic, e.g. parking areas of schools, churches, major shopping centres, major sports and multipurpose building complexes
5
20
10
20
50
20
20
20
50
20
100 100 200
40 20 60
5 20 50 100 100 200
20 20 20 40 40 60
Petrochemical and other hazardous industries • Handling of servicing tools, utilisation of manually regulated valves, starting and stopping motors, lighting of burners • Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with risk free substances, inspection of leakage, piping and packing • Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with dangerous substances, replacements of pump packing, general service work, reading of instruments • Fuel loading and unloading sites • Repair of machines and electric devices
Power, electricity, gas and heat plants • Pedestrian movements within electrically safe areas • Handling of servicing tools, coal • Overall inspection • General servicing work and reading of instruments • Wind tunnels: servicing and maintenance • Repair of electric devices
Railways and tramways
14 / Chapter 2
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 40 20
The Lighting Handbook
Railway areas including light railways, tramways, monorails, miniature rails, metro, etc. • Tracks in passenger station areas, including stabling 10 • Railway yards: flat marshalling, retarder and classification yards 10 • Hump areas 10 • Freight track, short duration operations 10 • Open platforms, rural and local trains, small number of passengers 15 • Walkways 20 • Level crossings 20 • Open platforms, suburban and regional trains with large number of passengers or inter-city services with small number of passengers 20 • Freight track, continuous operation 20 • Open platforms in freight areas 20 • Servicing trains and locomotives 20 • Railway yards handling areas 30
Type of area, task or activity
Em
• Coupling area • Stairs, small and medium-size stations • Open platforms, inter-city services • Covered platforms, suburban or regional trains or inter-city services with small number of passengers • Covered platforms in freight areas, short duration operations • Covered platforms, inter-city services • Stairs, large stations • Covered platforms in freight areas, continuous operation • Inspection pit
Ra
30 50 50
20 40 20
50 50 100 100 100 100
40 20 40 40 40 40
20
20
50 100 200 300
20 40 40 40
Saw mills • Timber handling on land and in water, sawdust and chip conveyors • Sorting of timber on land or in water, timber unloading points and sawn timber loading points, mechanical lifting to timber conveyor, stacking • Reading of addresses and markings of sawn timber • Grading and packaging • Feeding into stripping and chopping machines
Extracts from Austrian Standard (ÖNORM) EN 12464-1 Light and lighting – lighting of workplaces – Part 1: indoor workplaces (2003-04-01) Austrian Standard (ÖNORM) EN 12464-2 Light and lighting – lighting of workplaces – Part 2: outdoor workplaces (2007-10-01)
The Lighting Handbook
Austrian Standard (ÖNORM EN 12193) Light and lighting – sports facility lighting (2008-04-01) published with permission by the Austrian Standards Institute, A-1020 Vienna, Heinestrasse 38 Ordering of standards and products, as well as research on the subject at www.on-norm.at
Chapter 2 / 15
Chapter 3
Products (selection) ZUMTOBEL applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spots and tracks (SOLAR II, VIVO; VIVO-S + VIVO-SL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHTTOOLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CARDAN-SPIRIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARFLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2LIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS L and H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS M/MWW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS S and Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PASO II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAERO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHT FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIELOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTX II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FREELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free-standing uplights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEMLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORILED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HELISSA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SOLINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERLUCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCUBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ONLITE/ONLITE RESCLITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BELIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TETTOIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–5 6–9 10 – 11 12 – 13 14 – 17 18 – 23 24 – 25 26 27 – 28 29 30 – 31 32 – 33 34 – 35 36 – 37 38 – 39 40 – 41 42 – 43 44 – 45 46 – 47 48 – 49 50 – 57 58 – 59 60 – 61 62 – 63 64 – 67 68 – 69 70 – 71 72 – 73 74 – 75 76 – 77 78 – 85 86 – 87 88 – 89
Areas of application Throughout the world, ZUMTOBEL is the competent reliable partner for innovative lighting solutions in all areas of application of profes-
sional interior lighting â&#x20AC;&#x201C; providing global competence, superior product quality and futureproof technologies.
Industry and Engineering In production, the greatest demands are placed on the flexibility, functionality and building management system of industrial buildings. The right light in manufacturing and assembly bays as well as warehouses and workshops is the basis for any productive work.
The Lighting Handbook
Offices and Communication Spatial structures and lighting systems must be adapted to new types of work. What is required are flexible people, flexible architecture and flexible light which enhances communication and motivation and improves the quality of working and spending time at the office. Education and Science Using light to enhance communication, improve awareness and create social understanding: dynamic lighting solutions with optimum colour properties enhance peopleâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s concentration and improve visual comfort in educational facilities. www.zumtobel.com/applications
Chapter 3 / 3
Presentation and Retail Modern retail worlds must provide a quality of experience, their design becomes an expression of the brand message. Customised lighting solutions are an essential element of these worlds of experience. Hotel and Wellness Those who collect stars for their restaurant or hotel should not only work on their recipes. The guestsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; pleasure starts with the lighting that stimulates all senses.
Health and Care Light increases the patientsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; sense of wellbeing, creates a living-room ambience, supports the accomplishment of visual tasks in different therapies and examination procedures, makes orientation easier and ensures safety in circulation areas â&#x20AC;&#x201C; in hospitals, sanatoriums and retirement homes. 4 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/applications
The Lighting Handbook
Art and Culture Where the highest architectural requirements must be met, ever greater demands are also made on the element without which room impression and artistic delight are inconceivable: light as a modulating, accentuating factor of experience.
Sport and Leisure For each type of sport, special requirements must be met in terms of lighting. Optimum lighting has to ensure the safety of athletes and the best possible viewing conditions for those performing, the audience and the referees. Transit Areas and Parking Light is ideal to bring a more pleasant touch to utility buildings. Leaving oneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s car in a safely lit car park not only ensures that the paintwork will not be scratched but also that the driver will have a good feeling.
The Lighting Handbook
Orientation and Safety Lighting provides safety and ensures (self-)reliability: escape sign luminaires in a sophisticated design, and emergency lighting systems as an integral concept including the lighting management and service systems.
www.zumtobel.com/applications
Chapter 3 / 5
3-phase track
DALI track
– high professionalism due to variety of switching options – broad range of connectors for any type of track configuration – track can be easily installed on ceiling or wall; suspension from cord or pendant tube – tracks can be bent to specific radii; exception: tracks with supporting section – acceptable: tracks used within manual reach
– 3-phase track with built-in control lines for tapping DALI control signals – spotlights with DALI control gear can be individually dimmed and switched at zero power, independent of power supply – for each track, up to 64 DALI spots can be separately controlled – impressive, dynamic shows and lighting sequences can be run in combination with the EMOTION touch panel by ZUMTOBEL
In lighting technology, tracks and continuous row lighting systems are vital components providing the basis for active light design. Using DALI, impressive lighting scenarios can be created. A fascinating
interplay of dramatic brightness variations can be staged, while spotlights fitted with colour filters allow to set the stage for pleasant choreographies of coloured light.
6 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Spots and tracks – An unbeatable team
SOLAR II – New generation – flowing lines, organic design Application: A generation of expressive spotlights with soft and flowing lines for accent and display lighting in – shops & display windows – galleries & showrooms – private settings
The Lighting Handbook
Design by Massimo Iosa Ghini Models: – Spotlight system in two design sizes, in die-cast aluminium, titanium or white, fitted with electronic control gear only for use with state-of-the-art lamp technology:
– low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps up to 100 W – metal halide lamps 20 W to 70 W – wide range of accessories that can be combined
Pros: – universal 3-phase adapter by ZUMTOBEL – new generation of reflectors with four different beam angles, designed as interchangeable reflectors
– organic design – AFPS (AirFlow Protection System): increases reliability of electronic ballasts, extends service life of lamps
Benefits: – safe, convenient operation thanks to ZUMTOBEL’s new universal 3-phase adapter – can be quickly adjusted to changing lighting tasks using a wide range of interchangeable reflectors
– installation on DALI tracks with DALI transformer, and appropriate DALI adapters for easy integration with digital lighting management systems
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 7
VIVO – Light’s intuitive freedom of movement
Models: – Spotlight system in three design sizes, made of diecast aluminium, silver or white, microstructure paint. Fitted with electronic control gear only for use with stateof-the-art lamp technology:
Pros: – interchangeable reflectors – integral ball-and-socket joint – universal 3-phase adapter by ZUMTOBEL Benefits: – can be quickly adjusted to changing lighting tasks using a wide range of interchangeable reflectors – safe, convenient operation thanks to ZUMTOBEL’s new universal 3-phase adapter – intuitive, precise adjustment by means of integral clip
8 / Chapter 3
Design by EOOS
– low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps up to 100 W – metal halide lamps 20 W to 150 W – high-pressure sodium discharge lamps up to 100 W – wide range of accessories, also for lighting foodstuffs
– track box fitted parallel to track ensures uncluttered look on ceiling
– bayonet joint ensures minimum maintenance of lamps and easy replacement of reflectors and accessories – installation on DALI tracks with DALI transformer, and appropriate DALI adapters for easy integration with digital lighting management systems
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Application: ZUMTOBEL spotlight range for accent and display lighting. A real all-rounder for – shops, display windows & retail areas – department stores & supermarkets – galleries & showrooms – private settings
VIVO-S and VIVO-SL – Spotlight system with three hundred and sixty degrees precision Models: – Recessed spotlight; spotlight head pivots from position flush with ceiling to 90º – 2 design sizes: round and square
– HIT G8.5 35/70 W and QT 90 W lamps – electronic ballast must be ordered separately
Pros for VIVO-S: – pivots through up to 90° – rotates through 360° – pivots to position flush with ceiling – pivots progressively – Squeeze, Move and Retain (SMART) system for intuitive alignment Pros for VIVO-SL: – freedom of design, also in case of low-profile ceilings – pivots through up to 50° – Squeeze, Move and Retain (SMART) system for intuitive alignment
The Lighting Handbook
Benefits: – complete solution combining ceiling-mounted module and track – highly flexible, architecturally consistent lighting concept
– VIVO is a real all-rounder mastering every lighting task in shops and stores
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 9
LIGHTTOOLS – Modular lighting system: inconspicuous, easy to install, and versatile System range: – lighting channel, flushmounted, no flange – lighting channel, ceiling-bearing, with flange – lighting inserts for various spotlight applications – lighting inserts for floodlighting and wide-area lighting – all lighting inserts can be clicked in and positioned without the use of tools – electrical connection via plugin contact (no tools required)
Benefits: – only 100 mm wide, but with HIT up to 70 W – installed flush with ceiling (plasterboard ceilings), no flange – assembly of lengths on site – lighting inserts to be installed and shifted without any tools – prepared for operation with DALI (integral bus line) – extremely easy design (optional aid: configurator) – delivery ex warehouse, no special lengths required
10 / Chapter 3
Material/design: – channel sections in aluminium extrusion, U-shape, assembled using 3 sections – luminaire housing made of bent sheet steel – lighting heads made of diecast aluminium – floodlight housing made of extruded aluminium section – electronic control gear (optional: DALI gear)
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Application: – shops & display windows – foyers & corridor areas – showrooms & galleries – offices & office areas
Design by Studio Jean-Michel Wilmotte
Lamp(s): Spotlight
Floodlight Linear
– HIT-TC-CE/up to 70 W Spot & Flood – QT-LP 12/90 W Spot & Flood – QR-LP 70/50 W – HIT-CE G12/70 W – HST GX12/100 W – T 16 24 up to 54 W, DL & WF
3 pros: Current design – reduced to a minimum in material – extremely easy planning in advance, as exact definition of lengths not required until on site
The Lighting Handbook
Easy installation – only few components need to be installed – no additional connectors required – lighting inserts can be fitted without use of tools
Versatility – suitable for all types of ceilings: – without flange for plasterboard ceilings – ceiling-bearing (with flange) for all other ceilings – various different channel looks: – with pivoting lighting heads – with flush lighting heads – as an “open” channel (gap between lighting inserts open)
– building management thanks to DALI integration: – integral bus line in channel as standard – control gear installed optionally – “endless” cable duct up to 25 m, can be clicked in without use of tools, ensures minimum installation effort
– as a “closed” channel (gaps closed by cover sections)
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 11
CARDAN-SPIRIT – Modular lighting system: unobtrusive and flexible System range: Ceiling-recessed luminaires – autonomous design according to the SPIRIT spotlight range – fitted with up to 4 x 70 W HIT – extremely flat design of model fitted with QR111 – wide range of technical lighting accessories – easy replacement of reflectors Lighting frame – autonomous, unique design – high illumination output: up to 4 x 70 W HIT – can be fitted with mixed lamps – wide range of technical lighting accessories – DALI-compatible (inc. RGB colour changes) – can be installed in different locations in a room: – horizontally suspended – vertically suspended – installed on wall/ceiling
Design by Studio Jean-Michel Wilmotte
Lighting technology: – lighting heads for no-tool reflector replacement – silver-colour spot & flood specular reflectors – complete range of accessories for the “Spirit” spotlight range can be used – lighting heads pivot on gimbals through approx. 2 x 45°
– in lighting frames in particular: – built-in electronic ballasts, separately for each lamp – DALI version (transformers & bus feed line) available if required – RGB model as “stand-alone” version also available upon request
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
12 / Chapter 3
Application: – upmarket shops & shop windows – foyers & corridor areas – showrooms & galleries – entrance & office areas – prestigious private settings
Range/lamp(s): Ceiling-recessed luminaires – 1-lamp, round – 1-lamp to 4-lamp, square – QR 111/100 W (also FLAT) – QT 12/100 W Spot & Flood – HIT-TC-CE 35 + 70 W Spot & Flood – separate ballasts (accessories)
3 Pros: Functionality – complete SPIRIT accessories can be fitted – accessories replaced from the front (lamps & reflectors & filters) – ventilation of lighting head ensures optimum thermal conditions
Lighting frame – 2-lamp to 4-lamp – QR 111/100 W FLAT – QT 12/100 W Spot & Flood – HIT-TC-CE 35 + 70 W Spot & Flood – electronic ballasts included
Variety of creative design options – recessed into ceiling – horizontally & vertically suspended – installed on wall & underneath the ceiling
The Lighting Handbook
Lighting technology – Spirit lighting head as base – power packages: up to 4 x 70 W HIT – can be fitted with mixed lamps – prepared for DALI integration – FLAT version for QR 111
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 13
STARFLEX – The modular fibre optic system Fibre optic technology provides fascinating options for precise, impressive display lighting. A broad product range including light engines and optical fibres
as well as a variety of accessories allow to create customised lighting solutions for numerous applications.
Models: Engines – halogen QR-CBC 50–100 W light engines – HIT 35–250 W light engines – HIT 150/250 W light engines, controllable (DALI; 1–10 V; DMX) Light outlets – decorative crystal light heads – pivoting surface-mounted and recessed lenses with defined beam angle – IP-protected light outlets for outdoor and underwater applications – projection heads for extremely narrow-beam lighting as well as slide and gobo projections
Accessories – colour and colour temperature correction filters – colour and sparkle-effect wheel modules – control lines and input units 14 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Optical fibre – fibre with terminal light emission (glass; Schott Spectraflex) – fibre with terminal light emission (PMMA; Mitsubishi) – side-radiating fibre (PMMA, Mitsubishi)
Benefits: – precise direction of light – colour temperature can be adjusted to meet special project requirements – broad range of light engines from 35 W to 250 W, for indoor and outdoor areas as well as damp areas
– separation of light and electricity, UV and IR components – projection of logos or slides – modular design for customised project solutions
Pros: STARFLEX for presentation and retail – maintenance-friendly and – UV/IR-free lighting of fashion space-saving (e. g. display items, foodstuffs or cases with alarm system) jewellery/watches – can be integrated with light- – precise illumination of ing management solutions display windows and showvia control line of bus syscases tem STARFLEX for art and culture – conservational lighting without UV and IR components – light colour adjusted via corresponding light sources and fibre material
– precise narrow-beam illumination with sharp outlines via appropriate outlets
The Lighting Handbook
STARFLEX for wellness and fitness areas – underwater lighting in swim- – lighting of applications proming pools, wells and ponds viding accents (water film on stainless steel sheets, etc.) STARFLEX projection – Projection e. g.: at the cinema, for product advertising or visitor information in shops, museums and galleries based on fibre optics
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 15
Properties and applications of optical fibres Fibre Properties material Glass – can withstand relatively high temperatures (up to 110 °C) – extremely long service life (in excess of 20 years) – relatively tight bending radius – projects preferring relatively warm light colour PMMA – cheaper than glass – life time in excess of 20 years – projects involving relatively cool light colour – choice of side-radiating or terminal light emitting fibres – side-radiating and terminal light-emitting fibres can be combined in a single fibre bundle – fibre bundle can optionally be assembled on site
Applications – glass display cases in museums – saunas and steam baths – hotel and restaurant lighting
– applications requiring high levels of illumination – retail shop windows, display shelving and show cases – starry skies in hotels and wellness areas – outdoor lighting or in areas with high air humidity
Assembly of glass fibre bundles Outer diameter Maximum number of sheathing of individual fibres per common end spigot 2.2 mm 615 2.7 mm 307 3.9 mm 176 4.9 mm 79 6.4 mm 36 8.7 mm 20
1.0 mm 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 6.0 mm
Minimum bending radius 7 mm 11 mm 14 mm 21 mm 32 mm 42 mm
Length-based correction factors (attenuation) for glass fibre cables 1m 2m 3m
4m
5m 6m
7m 8m
9 m 10 m
0.93 0.87 0.81 0.76 0.71 0.66 0.62 0.57 0.54 0.50
16 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Active diameter of fibre cable
Assembly of PMMA fibre bundles (terminal light emission, factory-assembled) Active diameter of fibre cable
1.0 mm 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 6.0 mm 8.0 mm 10.0 mm
Outer diameter Maximum number of sheathing of individual fibres per common end spigot crimped/ spliced 2.2 mm 575/300 2.7 mm 342/165 4.0 mm 143/70 5.0 mm 72/35 6.5 mm 37/18 8.5 mm 20/10 10.5 mm 13/6 12.0 mm 8/4
Minimum bending radius
8 mm 12 mm 16 mm 24 mm 36 mm 48 mm 60 mm 75 mm
Length-based correction factors (attenuation) for PMMA cables 1m 2m 3m 4m
5m 6m
7m 8m
9 m 10 m
0.95 0.91 0.87 0.83 0.79 0.75 0.72 0.69 0.65 0.62
Assembly of PMMA fibre bundles (side radiation, factory-assembled)
The Lighting Handbook
Outer diameter Maximum number of of sheathing individual fibres per common end spigot (crimped) 4.5 mm 80 8.0 mm 19 11.0 mm 11 14.0 mm 6
Maximum number of individual fibres per common end spigot (spliced) 40 10 5 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 17
2LIGHT MINI – unique, high-quality MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting
Application: display lighting, restaurants, cafeterias, bars, reception areas, hotels, residential properties
2LIGHT-C MINI (CARDAN) – unique, high-quality MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting – maximum application flexibility thanks to integral pivoting lamp units
Application: sales counters, small presentation areas, points of sale, shelf lighting
2LIGHT MINI, surfacemounted – unique, high-quality MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting – surface-mounted housing can be installed quickly using CLIX mechanism
Application: display lighting, reception areas, corridors, foyers and all other applications for which surface-mounted luminaires can be used
2LIGHT – unique, high-quality downlight system for wide-area general lighting
Application: reception areas, waiting areas, restaurants, corridors, foyers, conference rooms, relaxation areas, shopping arcades
18 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
2LIGHT – High-quality downlight system
2LIGHT-C (CARDAN) – unique high-quality downlight system for accent lighting – maximum application flexibility thanks to integral pivoting lamp units
Application: shops, retail areas, presentation areas, museums
2LIGHT MDW (multi-directional wallwasher) – innovative, fully flexible wallwasher reflector technology for brightening up vertical areas
Application: corridors, offices, conference rooms, waiting areas, restaurants
Design by Hartmut S. Engel
The Lighting Handbook
Impressive looks Winner of the 2005 iF Design Award – unobtrusive, flat aluminium frame in titanium colour – high-quality printed safety glass panel – unique Mellow Downlight effect
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 19
Benefits:
Easiest possible maintenance/easy handling 2LIGHT has a completely closed housing. At the same time, 2LIGHT is light-tight in the ceiling. The unique EasyClean catch enables quick and easy relamping.
20 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Unique technical lighting features innovative principle of reflector splitting â&#x20AC;&#x201C; diffuse light: a special matt-sanded plastic panel behind the safety glass ensures a matched soft light component around the reflector. Soft, pleasantly bright light is provided. â&#x20AC;&#x201C; direct reflector light: light component directed downwards via facetted reflector.
Models:
2LIGHT (fixed)
2LIGHT-C (pivots on gimbals)
2LIGHT MDW (multi-directional wallwasher)
2LIGHT MINI single module 2LIGHT MINI double module 2LIGHT MINI triple module 2LIGHT MINI surfacemounted 2LIGHT single module
2LIGHT double module
The Lighting Handbook
2LIGHT triple module
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 21
22 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW double module
408 x 216 mm
152 mm
127 x 127 mm x â&#x20AC;&#x201C; (height) 175 mm 216 x 216 mm 152 mm
103 mm
373 x 118 mm
120 mm 103 mm
118 x 118 mm
2LIGHT MINI single module 2LIGHT-C MINI double module 2LIGHT-C MINI triple module 2LIGHT MINI Surface-mounted 2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW single module TC-TELI 2x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 2x20/35/70 W HIT-CE 2x35/70 W
LED WN/WW or LED RGB/W new! CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 50 W CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 50 W CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 75 W TC-TELI 1x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W HIT-CE 1x35/70 W
Mounting depth Lamp(s) 100 mm CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 75 W
256 x 118 mm
Module size 118 x 118 mm
Type 2LIGHT MINI 2LIGHT-C MINI
Colour filter for soft light component Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Multi Directional Wallwasher Colour filter for soft light component Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Multi Directional Wallwasher
Colour filter Mounting kit for thin ceilings Colour filter Mounting kit for thin ceilings Colour filter
Accessories Colour filter Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Mounting kit for thin ceilings
IP 44
IP 44
IP 40
IP 44
IP 44
IP 44
Protection class IP 44
Overview:
216 x 216 mm
408 x 216 mm
600 x 216 mm
2LIGHT-C double module
2LIGHT-C triple module
600 x 216 mm
2LIGHT-C single module
2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW triple module
The Lighting Handbook
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 23
152 mm
152 mm
152 mm
152 mm
TC-TELI 3x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 3x20/35/70 W
TC-TELI 2x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 2x20/35/70 W
TC-TELI 1x32/42 W TC-L 1x80 W/2x55 W T-16 3x24 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W HIT-CE 3x35/70 W TC-TELI 1x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W Colour filter for soft light component and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Colour filter for soft light component and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Colour filter for soft light component and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors
Colour filter for soft light component Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Multi Directional Wallwasher
IP 44
IP 44
IP 44
IP 44
PANOS L and H – Multi-talented downlights PANOS L – recessed depth of just 100 mm – maximum efficiency levels PANOS H – satisfies the most stringent glare limitation requirements without the need for accessories
Reflectors and their applications
HF/LF The precision-shaped facets provide brilliant effects, reduced luminance levels and optimum efficiency.
HG/LG Highly specular darklight reflector optic for glare-free working at the highest level.
HM/LM Good looks are guaranteed by this matt reflector optic with reduced dust sensitivity.
HL/LL The white reflector optic is a perfect match for the decorative accessories.
HWW The special ribbed structure of the reflector produces asymmetrical light distribution, ideal for highlighting vertical surfaces. 24 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Design by Sottsass Associati
PSP+® (Pure Silver Plated+) – brilliant new finish for downlight with silber-plated reflector What is innova– glare control in conformity tive about the with EN 12464 standard, ® new PSP+ surface is already without using technical lighting accessories revealed by its name: Pure Silver Plated+ –100 % silver, – optimum reflection so-called high-purity silver, is of heat precisely applied onto the – longer lamp service life high-quality polycarbonate thanks to reduced temreflectors of the PANOS L+H peratures ranges by means of sputtering, – ideal temperature manand sealed. Facetted, smooth agement allows lamps to and wallwasher finishes are operate in optimum output available. range Benefits: – tremendous light output – light output ratio increased by as much as 21% – increased lighting level leads to reduced maintenance factor
– innovative surface stability – extremely durable and ultra-hard reflector surface – excellent maintenance qualities – iridescence-free reflector
Finest aluminium and silver plating by sputtering Sputtering is a unique, highquality 4-chamber metallising process applied at high vacuum. Benefits: – optimum lighting effect at high efficiency levels, per-
fect glare control and ideal light distribution – high-quality appearance with darklight effect and iridescence-free reflector – extremely easy maintenance and easy cleaning
The Lighting Handbook
Installation instructions No-tool installation The mounting ring made of die-cast aluminium is fitted without tools using spring clips. Combined refl./flange unit The reflector/flange unit is
installed by means of a “twist and lock mechanism” without any tools. The ballast box has a rapid locking device and forms a pre-assembled luminaire unit with the reflector.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 25
PANOS M/MWW â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Impressive and powerful PANOS M Metal reflector for high temperature resistance. Mounting rings and cooling attachments made of die-cast aluminium. Ideal for use with lamps that generate a lot of heat.
PANOS M LG/HG and PANOS M LM/HM Outstanding surface properties and optimum thermal management ensure maximum luminous flux when fitted with 2 x 42 W TC-TELI. The luminaire is light-tight in the ceiling, and can be operated completely closed with IP54. It is ideal for use with strict fire regulations.
Wide range of lamps With the wide range of lamps that can be fitted, PANOS M and MWW give lighting designers maximum freedom for professionally setting the lighting stage. 26 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
PANOS MWW As regards its look on the ceiling, the wallwasher with asymmetrical light distribution is not different from rotationally symmetrical luminaires. It does not interfere with the interior design.
PANOS S – Incredibly versatile, providing more freedom for vertical adjustment
With PANOS S fully swivelled out to 60°, it is possible to illuminate a wall from its top edge.
As the lighting head and the housing are separately adjustable, specific areas can be shaded.
For illumination of different levels of shelving, PANOS S can be swivelled into the ceiling by up to 45°.
Suitable reflectors for any situation Comparing light distribution/room: length 5 m, height 3 m Accent lighting by PANOS S150 with HIT G8.5
4 x PANOS S150 FL 70 W 500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
Accent lighting by PANOS S200 with HIT G12
4 x PANOS S200 FL 70 W 500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
The Lighting Handbook
Wallwashing by PANOS S250 with HIT-DE
500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
3 x PANOS S250 70 W
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 27
PANOS Q – Square downlight for uncompromising looks and lighting technology Perfect one-piece reflector base Consistently square reflector, light-tight, made of high-quality UV-resistant polycarbonate for perfect light distribution.
Persuasive freedom of design – various reflector optics: faceted, smooth, matt and painted – various cover frames: white, titanium, chromium, frameless
– trendy attachments fitted as block or frame – suspended attachment and technical lighting accessories
PANOS Q Low
PANOS Q High
Reflector models faceted
smooth
Frame models
matt
white
frameless model
titanium chrome white
Attachments
Less installation time – PANOS no-tool quick installation – “shift & lock” system for fixing cover frame – quick and easy subsequent installation of attachements
28 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Attachments
Surface-mounted
190/190 250/250
150
PANOS A/AD
PANOS Q
PANOS LED
www.zumtobel.com/productsites smooth, painted matt
faceted, smooth, painted, matt, wallwasher faceted, smooth, painted, matt
spot, flood
100/150/200/250
PANOS S
Reflector optic Light distribution faceted, smooth, painted, matt faceted, smooth, painted, matt, wallwasher smooth, partly structrured smooth, matt asymmetrical
100/150/200/250
Ceiling cut-out Light sources 175/200/250
PANOS M LG/HG 200/250 PANOS M LM/HM PANOS MWW 150/200
PANOS M
PANOS H
Type PANOS L
The Lighting Handbook
for ceilings without mounting depth, reduced building and installation costs, large variety of surface finishes perfect one-piece reflector base, optimum, glare control (DSE-compatible), exceptional, design freedom (colours + attachments) 1000 lm/2000 lm white light or 1000 lm BioMotion 2700/6500 K, high light output ratio, perfect glare control, long service life, energy-efficient, IR/UV-free light
general lighting with high wattages, lhousing light-tight uniform illumination of vertical areas, calm, uniform ceiling look uncompromising flexibility, can be swivelled in and out, highly convenient control
Features high light output ratio, mounting depth only 100 mm, variety of surface finishes perfect glare control, DSE-compatible without attachment, illumination of vertical areas huge variety of light sources, consistent appearance, flat circular design
Overview of the PANOS range
Chapter 3 / 29
PASO II – Recessed floor luminaire system
Models: PASO II D/Q 120 – LED with LEDOS board units and PowerLED – QR-CBC and PAR 16 – “MicroLynxF” 7 W compact fluorescent lamps PASO II D/Q 190 – QR-CBC and QR 111 – TC-TEL compact fluorescent lamps – HIT-TC-CE 20 W PASO II D/Q 260 – PAR 38 – TC-TEL compact fluorescent lamps – LED floor lighting tile – HIT up to 70 W, HST 50 W Application: – shops & display windows – galleries & showrooms – hotels & wellness Benefits: – flush with floor or overlapping frame without visible screw heads – “glass-only” model – models with reduced surface temperature to protect people and property 30 / Chapter 3
round or square. A generous helping of lighting technology packed into models ranging in size from small to large allows fine-tuning to provide customised lighting solutions.
(120 mm Ø or side length)
(190 mm Ø or side length)
(260 mm Ø or side length) – prestigious private settings, indoor and outdoor areas
– patented sealing system to protect against penetration of surface water – various technical lighting accessories
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
PASO II knows just how to hit all the right buttons when it comes to setting dramatic contemporary lighting scenes whilst nevertheless remaining unobtrusive itself. The luminaire housing and covers are
Pros: PASO II with LED technology – luminaires with LED boards for decorative pinpoint lighting in static version or with variable RGB colours
– luminaires with PowerLEDs for lighting columns – lighting tile with variable RGB colours, for recess into floor
PASO II – everything in the right light Guiding light
Spot and superspot
Floodlighting
Wallwashers
PASO II extra low-profile design Use in screeded floors, without impacting on the structural calculations of concrete ceilings
100 mm
PASO II D/Q range, low-profile design
The Lighting Handbook
190 mm HIT 20 W compact fluorescent lamps up to 10 W TC-DEL
260 mm HIT 20 W compact fluorescent lamps up to 18 W TC-DEL
370 mm HIT bis 70 W compact fluorescent lamps up to 18 W TC-DEL/TC-F 36 W
PASO II accessories for an impressive yet safe presence – colour filters for coloured – honeycomb meshes for glare accent lighting control – casting surround for quick – IR blocking filters for reducing and safe installation surface temperature – mounting kit for cavity floors/ – anti-slip glass panel available hollow ceilings for fixing PASO upon request II luminaires with overlapping – IP 67 general-purpose box for frame cover external control gear (PASO II S) www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 31
VAERO – Waveguide luminaire providing soothing light for people and rooms
Design by Hartmut S. Engel Ingeniously designed VAERO waveguide luminaire with MPO lighting technology for maxi-
mum energy efficiency. 2 designs available – structured and homogeneous.
Balance between energy efficiency and lighting quality The sandwich construction of the micropyramidal optic lets the light really sparkle. Together with two other layers,
it forms an optical system that ensures glare control in conformity with relevant standards at flat angles (EN 12464) and reduced luminance at steep angles.
Diffusor layer Micro-pyramidal layer for directing light
The “Photometric examination of new lighting systems” research carried out at TU Ilmenau demonstrates that systems using MPO technology obtain excellent values with respect to contrasts in the room, in the task area and on the screen. 32 / Chapter 3
Via adjustable reflectors, the light distribution curve of the luminaire’s indirect component can be adjusted to the suspension height of the luminaire.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Base
The Lighting Handbook
Lighting quality created by contrast engineering
Contrasts in the room Brightness perceived at the workplace is determined not only by illuminance – in fact, ceilings and walls have a
major impact, too. Balanced luminance levels create a pleasant, natural working atmosphere.
Contrasts between ceiling and luminaire Bright ceilings open up a room. The luminaires and their luminance levels blend
harmoniously into the brightness pattern of the ceiling. The variable pendant length of VAERO and adjustable indirect components are unique.
Contrast rendition in the task area Visual contrasts in the task area are determined by luminance ratios, e. g. ink colour on background.
The reduced luminance of the MPO diffuser helps to improve contrast rendition (see TU Ilmenau research).
Contrast rendition on screens In every location, and no matter what the angle of inclination, screens must remain
free from annoying reflections. Thanks to the MPO diffuser – and reduced luminance –, the viewability of computer screens is excellent.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 33
LIGHT FIELDS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Modular micro-pyramidal lighting system
Design by Sottsass Associati Pure innovation for the office Micro-pyramidal optic
base micro-pyramidal layer for directing the light diffuser layer
34 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Even in surface-mounted and recessed luminaires, the sandwich construction of the micro-pyramidal optic ensures both glare control in conformity with standards and reduced luminance for direct illumination â&#x20AC;&#x201C; ideal for office lighting according to standard EN 12464.
Available as recessed/surface-mounted/pendant/ free-standing or cluster luminaires, they are ideal for the more stylish office, with EN 12464 compliance over a range of ceiling heights and floor areas.
M 625
M 600
Recessed 1198 x 298 2/28 W T16 1498 x 298 2/35 W T16 598 x 598 4/14 W T16 1248 x 310 2/28 W T16 1548 x 310 2/35 W T16 623 x 623 4/14 W T16
Surfacemounted 1248 x 310 2/28 W T16 1548 x 310 2/35 W T16 623 x 623 4/14 W T16
The Lighting Handbook
LIGHT FIELDS model Recessed L-FIELDS E 4 x 4/14 W T16 L-FIELDS E 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS E 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS E 6 x 4/14 W T16 Surface-mounted L-FIELDS A 4 x 4/14 W T16 L-FIELDS A 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS A 3 x 2/35 W T16 L-FIELDS A 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS A 6 x 4/14 W T16
ID pendant 1248 x 310 2/54 W T16 1548 x 310 2/49 W T16 623 x 623 4/24 W T16
Free-standing luminaire 3/55 W TCL 3/80 W TCL
1-person office
2-person office
•
• • •
3-person office
• • •
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
• • • • •
Chapter 3 / 35
MELLOW LIGHT IV – A piece of sky Balance, energy efficiency and lighting quality Owing to their light distribution characteristics, MELLOW LIGHT IV surface-mounted and recessed luminaires bring a “piece of sky” into the room. Design by Studio & Partners Technical lighting features: – bright visible luminance levels create an attractive impression of brightness – light is distributed uniformly in the room. In the process, not only is a high level
of uniformity achieved on the useful plane, but room peripheries such as ceilings and walls can be selectively brightened up as well. This allows for active brightness management. 100
Efficiency level of 57 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with slotted sheet steel controller optic and 55 W TC-L lamp
50
0
Efficiency level of 67 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with slotted sheet steel controller optic and two 24 W T5 lamps
100
50
0
Effiency level of more than 80 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with microprismatic optic and two 24 W T5 lamps
Bright, pleasant room impression …or “cave effect” with convenwith MELLOW LIGHT IV… tional solutions using louvre luminaires. 36 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Efficiency level of more than 70 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with microprismatic optic and 55 W TC-L lamp
Direct and reflected glare on upright and steeply inclined displays is minimised, allowing for lighting solutions in conformity with the EN 12464 standard.
Application and glare control
0 – 10 Organizer
0 – 40 Displays
40 – 90 Laptops
55 – 90 Flatscreens
65 – 90 Conventional display
The more strongly inclined a computer display is, the higher are the requirements for glare control of the lighting system – in particular where it has been installed directly above the workstation.
The Lighting Handbook
Micro-prismatic optic with cross pattern – innovative optic for maximum energy efficiency – gentle light for ergonomically beneficial lighting conditions – in line with the basic concept of Mellow Light – screening prevents direct view of light source – ideal for upright and inclined displays (luminance reduced at all angles of view) – free arrangement in the room, without taking position of workstation into account (demonstrated by TU Illmenau research) Slotted sheet steel controller optic – design-oriented slotted sheet steel controller optic – gentle light for ergonomically beneficial lighting conditions
– in line with the basic concept of Mellow Light – screening prevents direct view of light source – ideal for upright and inclined displays (luminance reduced at all angles of view) – free arrangement in the room, without taking position of workstation into account (demonstrated by TU Ilmenau research) Louvre optic – classic with louvre technology in conformity with relevant standards – combination of proven, efficient louvre technology and the typical gentle lighting effects of Mellow Light – glare control for upright displays meets specifications of EN12464 (with or without extra filter, depending on luminaire model)
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 37
CIELOS – Modular luminous ceiling for creating designs with light and colour
Design by Nicholas Grimshaw & Partners
Models: – 2 heights: 80 mm and 150 mm – 80 mm for white and monochrome – 150 mm for RGB – from 4/14 W to 12/21 W
38 / Chapter 3
– entrance areas – conference and meeting rooms – shops
– 600 x 600 mm 900 x 900 mm – dynamic colour changes, controlled via EMOTION Touch
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Application: Luminous ceilings capture our attention. Wide-area, diffuse lighting fascinates the viewer. Combined with selective accents, a room’s ambience can be changed radically.
Pros: Conventional luminous ceilings use almost no lighting technology at all. They rely exclusively on maximum clearance between lamp and diffuser in order to produce uniform illumination.
Mounting heights often range from 300 to 700 mm, yet hardly any of these luminous ceilings offers the same colour neutrality and infinite colour spectrum as CIELOS.
The Lighting Handbook
Coloured lamps or sheathing the T16 light sources in coloured film produces coloured light. Special coloured films that emit especially intense, pure light were developed for CIELOS. They are available as accessories in the three primary colours red, green and blue. Any other coloured film suitable for use in luminaires can also be used.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 39
CLARIS II – Luminaire system Minimised design with improved technical lighting features. Its angular shape and clear lines are unmistakable features of CLARIS II. Complete range: – indirect/direct pendant luminaire – surface-mounted luminaire – wallwasher
Lighting technology: – miniature cell louvre used – DSE-compatible luminaire
Optics for all applications: Darklight louvre – specular louvre ensures ideal glare control according to EN 12464 Matt comfort louvre – bright, friendly room atmosphere – in conformity with EN 12464 standard Surface finishes: powder-coated titanium or natural anodised finish
40 / Chapter 3
Design by ag Licht, Bonn
– meets requirements for lighting of office areas according to EN 12464
Opal diffuser – closed luminaire – diffuse light distribution – harmoniously soft light creates communicative room atmosphere
Easy design: easy design is ensured by standard module lengths
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Application: – offices and schools
Practical technology Lamps are replaced straightforwardly from the top of the luminaire. Thanks to the convenient lever, releasing and replacing the light source is child’s play. Installation: time is money Invisible height adjustment inside, adjustment in longitudinal direction
All inclusive Luminaire includes pre-installed suspension assembly, transparent connecting cable already fitted, light source already integrated, plus protective film Can be used for continuous row lighting CLARIS II configurations Continuous row luminaires (pendant luminaires): – indirect/direct – direct only – indirect only – wallwasher
300
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
300
300
225
225 225
300
150
The Lighting Handbook
Connectors for continuous design
Chapter 3 / 41
RTX II – Design-oriented continuous row lighting system
Design by Charles Keller Avant-garde in terms of both material and shape Application: offices and schools
Individual luminaires and continuous row systems: – Pure aluminium – Matt bivergent or darklight reflector optic – Wallwasher for illuminating blackboards – Decorative optics
Typical applications RTX II-C 1/35W 1/49W 1/54W 1/80W 2/28W 2/35W 2/49W 2/54W
Day school Technical college/ evening school Office Office with DSE Open-plan office Technical drawing
RTX II-D
42 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
1/35W 1/49W 1/54W 1/80W 2/28W 2/35W 2/49W 2/54W
Day school Technical college/ evening school Office Office with DSE Open-plan office Technical drawing
RTX II Wallwasher RTX II 1 x 49 W RTX II 1 x 54 W RTX II 1 x 80 W RTX RTX RTX RTX
II II II II
2 x 28 W 2 x 35 W 2 x 49 W 2 x 54 W
300 Lux
0.20
(Day school)
0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 blackboard â&#x20AC;&#x201C; luminaire distance [m]
optimum range possible range possible range under certain conditions*
* Use strongly depends on architectural parameters and luminaire arrangement.
RTX II 1 x 80 W RTX II 2 x 49 W RTX II 2 x 54 W
500 Lux (Evening school and technical colleges)
0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 blackboard â&#x20AC;&#x201C; luminaire distance [m]
optimum range possible range
The Lighting Handbook
possible range under certain conditions*
* Use strongly depends on architectural parameters and luminaire arrangement.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 43
MIRAL T16 – Surface-mounted louvre luminaire Complete louvre luminaire range: – surface-mounted luminaire – indirect/direct pendant luminaire – wallwasher Application: offices, schools, shops Benefits: – BIVERGENZ® plus lighting technology – quick installation thanks to – mounting bracket – externally located terminal block – pre-fitted lamp – protective film Lay in
Fold up
Snap in
Light source included MIRAL T16 is pre-fitted with an LF840 lamp (optionally LF830). This keeps the installation effort to a minimum, saving the time, resources and energy that would otherwise be spent on lamp procurement, transport and temporary storage.
Electrical connection Quick installation is also guaranteed thanks to the exactly centered 5-pole plug-in terminal (CE-compliant) easily accessible from outside the luminaire. Thus the connecting cable can be fitted conveniently and in minimum time without needing to open the luminaire housing.
Packaging The mounting brackets are located ready for use outside the box so there is no need to open it. Advantage: the luminaire remains protected in its packaging during preinstallation.
Protective film A special self-adhesive protective film made of recyclable material offers optimum protection against louvre soiling. MIRAL T16 can therefore be fully installed whilst building work is still in progress, and even used to light the construction site. Once the building is finished, simply pull away the film which leaves no residue.
44 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Design by Studio Ambrozus
Traditional installation
MIRAL T16 installation
The Lighting Handbook
Traditional installation for the electrician meant four trips up and down the ladder, two operations with the electric screwdriver. MIRAL T16 installation for the electrician means getting the same result in half the time!
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 45
FREELINE – The TASK AREA luminaire – TASK AREA luminaire for task area-related indirect/ direct lighting – luminaires are arranged between room axes, directly above workstation and at right angle to window – one luminaire per workstation ensures lighting conditions in conformity with relevant standards
Design by Ingenhoven and Partner Architekten
FREELINE (MPO technology) 46 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
FREELINE (matt bivergent louvre)
Lighting technology: matt bivergent louvre for optimum lighting conditions at the workstation – Wattages: 1/54 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 1/80 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 2/54 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 Models with electronic ballast, DALI-dimmable or dimming-on-demand function (LDoD)
Lighting technology: micro-pyramidal optic with glare-free light radiation characteristics
The Lighting Handbook
– Wattages: 2 x 1/49 W T16 2 x 1/54 W T16 2 x 1/80 W T16 Models with electronic ballast, DALI-dimmable or dimming-on-demand function (LDoD)
– Designed by: IOA (Ingenhoven Overdiek Architekten)/Düsseldorf – Dimensions: length 2436 mm (54 W) or length 2736 mm (80 W) width 98 mm height 62 mm weight: 4.5 kg – Material: extruded aluminium, natural anodised finish
– Designed by: IOA (Ingenhoven Overdiek Architekten)/Düsseldorf – Dimensions: length 2436 mm (54 W) or length 3036 mm (80 W) width 98 mm height 62 mm weight: 4.5 kg – Material: extruded aluminium, natural anodised finish
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 47
Free-standing uplights – LIGHT FIELDS-S, MINIUM LITE, KAREA, LANOS ... Free-standing uplights … … provide maximum flexibility when changing or reorganising one’s place;
… can be personalised, are customised and energyefficient;
… can be positioned freely at the workplace;
… can be installed quickly, easily, as required and independent of the building;
… focus light onto the visual task area;
LIGHT FIELDS-S Brilliant light thanks to innovative MPO-PLUS technology Design by Sottsass Associati
MINIUM LITE Max. energy efficiency and reduced installed load Design by Engel & Zimmermann
– indirect/direct distribution – asymmetrical indirect component – 3/55 W or 3/80 W TC-L – direct component via micropyramidal optic – glare reduction L<1000 cd/m2 (3/55 W) – reflector can be swung open for easy cleaning – flat luminaire head made of anodised aluminium – backlit decorative frame attached
– indirect/direct distribution – 2 x 1/55 W or 2 x 1/80 W TC-L – large direct component with cell louvre in darklight or matt comfort optic – glare reduction L<1000 cd/m2 – two separate luminaire heads made of anodised aluminium – heads pre-assembled for extremely quick installation – stand made of anodised aluminium – U-shaped steel base
48 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
… don’t have to be installed on/in the ceiling, allow for low level heights.
The Lighting Handbook
KAREA Flexible design – unobtrusive appearance Design by DaCosta & Wolf
LANOS Pleasant lighting effect in a classic design Design by DaCosta & Wolf
– indirect/direct distribution – 4/55 W TC-L – direct component via perforated metal optic – flat luminaire head – angular aluminium stand with asym. or symmetrical luminaire-head connection – U-shaped or square base (steel) – colours: titanium, or silver microstructure paint – available in heights of 1850 mm or 2000 mm
– indirect/direct distribution – 4/55 W TC-L – luminaire head with lateral perforated metal refractors – rounded aluminium stand with asymmetrical or symmetrical luminaire-head connection – U-shaped or square steel base – colours: titanium, or silver microstructure paint – available in heights of 1850 mm or 2000 mm
SwitchDim and SensControl allow users to adjust the lighting to meet their personal requirements. From simple switching and dimming through to fully automatic control using presence detectors and brightness sensors, free-standing uplights by ZUMTOBEL provide the perfect solution meeting any requirement. SensControlDALI goes even further by using DALI to integrate the free-standing uplight into the building’s lighting management system.
SwitchDim Simple dimming and switching using momentary-action switches SensControl Fully automatic control based on daylight and the user’s presence SensControl-DALI additional option for link to LITENET lighting management systems
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 49
LED luminaires – From semiconductor to lighting innovation Static and dynamic light
– high colour stability – efficient control thanks to simple control system – low heat generation – light without IR/UV
Benefits of LED technology in comparison with low-voltage halogen
In comparison with low-voltage halogen, light without IR/UV in particular, and consequently the absence of any heat radiation, is one of the main benefits. The energy efficiency of LEDs greatly exceeds that of low-voltage halogen luminaires.
Benefits of LED technology in comparison with fluorescent lamps
In comparison with compact fluorescent lamps, the benefits are slightly smaller. In addition to conservational lighting and long maintenance intervals, projected light is a main benefit. The light can be optimally directed into the area required by means of lens optics, which means that the illumination output can be used much more efficiently. Moreover, cove lighting in dynamic colours can be generated in a space-saving and energy-efficient manner, e.g. by means of LED RGB lighting solutions.
50 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Benefits of LED technology: – long service life = low maintenance costs – low power consumption = minimum operating costs – vibration and impact-proof – compact size
Limits of LED technology
Today, the LED is less energyefficient than the following lamp technologies: – fluorescent lamps: 80–100 lm/W – high-pressure halogen lamps: 90–100 lm/W – high-pressure sodium vapour lamps: 100–120 lm/W – LEDs: 40–80 lm/W
The Lighting Handbook
LEDs don’t like high ambient temperatures. If LEDs are used at high ambient temperatures (e.g. sauna, etc.), this will strongly effect luminous flux and reduce the LEDs’ service life. High-performance LEDs generate a lot of heat at the board side. In order to ensure a service life of 50,000 hours for an LED luminaire, the boards must be properly cooled (e.g. cooling fins, ventilator or water cooling).
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 51
Typical applications
Properties – 1000 lm projected light – colour temperature adjustable from 2700–6500 K – “stand-alone” variation has a 4-button control panel for setting colour temperature with six pre-defined steps – RGB colour dynamism via EMOTION touch panel or DMX – colour temperature adjustable from 2700–6500 K – RGB colour dynamism via DMX
– 1000 lm and 2000 lm as an alternative to 18 W/26 W compact fluorescent lamps – colour temperatures of 3000 K and 4000 K
– 1000 lm projected light – colour temperature adjustable from 2700–6500 K – RGB colour dynamism via EMOTION touch panel or DMX
– swivelling recessed downlights for decorative accent lighting
– 350 lm projected light as an alternative to 20 W low voltage halogen – indirect RGB light for “mellow downlight” effect in dynamic colours
– 1000 lm as an alternative to 18 W compact fluorescent lamps – colour temperatures of 3000 K and 4000 K
– 1100 lm projected light with 3000 K – 1300 lm projected light with 4000 K – projected LED accent light as an alternative to 75 W low voltage halogen
* with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires, dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear!
52 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Supply
Switchable/ dimmable*
Monochrome/ RGB
Indoor/outdoor applications
230 V
switchable, dimmable DALI (via Emotion touch panel), dimmable DMX
control of white light via RGB RGB
indoor applications
Product
TEMPURA spotlight
230 V
dimmable DALI, dimmable DMX
control of white light via RGB RGB
indoor applications
TEMPURA downlight
230 V
switchable, dimmable DALI
white
indoor applications
PANOS PureWhite
230 V
dimmable DALI (via Emotion touch panel)
control of white light via RGB RGB
indoor applications
PANOS BioMotion
350 mA
switchable, dimmable
white blue
indoor applications
PANOS S
24 V
switchable, dimmable DALI
RGB + white
indoor applications
2LIGHT MINI RGB/W
230 V
switchable, dimmable DALI
white
indoor applications
2LIGHT MINI PureWh.
230 V
switchable, dimmable DALI (via Emotion touch panel)
white
indoor applications
VIVO LED
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 53
Typical applications
Properties – 300 lm projected light – 3000 K and 4700 K colour temperatures
– system combines miniaturised LED spots for accent lighting with T16 fluorescent lamps for wallwashing – LED light lines for room illumination and atmospheric lighting effects
– single and nine-fold modules – nine-fold modules feature dynamic light design whereby the individual lighting cubes can be randomly dimmed up and down
– colour temperature via control button in six pre-defined steps from 2700–6500 K – luminaire is part of the SCONFINE pendant luminaire series
– illuminance in accordance with EN 1838 for additional emergency lighting close to ground level – unique lens/reflector optic ensures optimal light distribution on the floor – available in colour temperature of 3000 K/5000 K – modular LED light line system for individual, slot and channel mounting – not suitable for installation in floors!
– modular LED light line system for individual, slot and channel mounting – SYSTEMLED Deco Basic optimised for cove lighting – not suitable for installation in floors!
– IP 68 version for underwater lighting – walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg
* with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires, dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear!
54 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Supply
Switchable/ dimmable*
Monochrome/ RGB
Indoor/outdoor applications
24 V
switchable, dimmable
white
indoor applications
Product
MICROS
24 V 230 V
switchable, dimmable (light lines)
white RGB (light lines)
indoor applications
SUPERSYSTEM
230 V
switchable
monochrome
indoor applications
SCONFINE CUBO
230 V
switchable, dimmable
white
indoor applications
SCONFINE SFERA
230 V 350 mA
switchable, dimmable
white blue
indoor applications outdoor applications ORILED
24 V
switchable, dimmable
white blue RGB
indoor applications outdoor applications SYSTEMLED FLOOD
24 V
switchable, dimmable
white blue RGB
indoor applications outdoor applications SYSTEMLED DECO
230 V 24 V
switchable, dimmable
yellow red green white blue
indoor applications outdoor applications LEDOS M
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 55
Typical applications
Properties – 8 mm mounting depth allows installation in parquet, tiles and laminated flooring – suitable for installation in furniture – walk-over capacity to max. 250 kg
– accent spotlight (spot/flood) – walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg
– available in colour temperature of 3000 K/5700 K – uniformly illuminated light points or surfaces – walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg
– diffuser with transparent sides gives the luminaire unit a floating appearance – model without frame also available
– extremely easy wiring via self-tapping cable connector for indoor applications
– walk-over capacity to max. 500 kg – RGB models feature integrated DALI power supply unit – also available as a wall-mounted version
– also available as a decorative floor lighting tile (IP 67)
– “glass only” model available for indoor applications – walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg
* with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires, dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear!
56 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Supply
Switchable/ dimmable*
Monochrome/ RGB
Indoor/outdoor applications
24 V
switchable, dimmable
white blue
indoor applications
Product
LEDOS O
230 V 24 V 350 mA
switchable, dimmable
white blue RGB
indoor applications outdoor applications LEDOS B
230 V 24 V
switchable, dimmable
white blue RGB
indoor applications outdoor applications LEDOS
230 V 24 V
switchable, dimmable
white blue RGB
indoor applications outdoor applications LEDOS II
230 V 24 V
230 V
switchable, dimmable
switchable, RGB dimmable DALI
yellow red green white blue RGB
indoor applications outdoor applications
white blue RGB
indoor applications outdoor applications
KAVA LED
PHAOS LINE
24 V
dimmable
RGB
indoor applications
PHAOS lighting tile
230 V 24 V 350 mA
switchable, dimmable
white blue RGB
indoor applications outdoor applications PASO II LED
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 57
SYSTEMLED â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Modular LED light lines
SYSTEMLED is a modular LED system for decorative light lines or wide-area illumination of walls. Pre-assembled plugin connectors at the modules help to reduce sources of error during installation, and minimise installation effort. The use of aluminium sections ensures optimum cooling of LED boards, which is a prereq-
uisite to reach a service life of up to 50,000 hours! Varied accessories including a mounting channel, mounting springs and a diffuser provide for a wide range of applications. SYSTEMLED can be used in both indoor and outdoor areas.
Channel installation: No-tool wiring using cables with pre-configured connectors.
58 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Using special steel springs, the modules are fitted in the channel or wall and ceiling cut-out without the use of any tools.
Options for installation: Pre-assembled modules in various lengths allow to flexibly adjust the light lines to projectspecific sections. DECOLINE is perfect for illuminating coves and for creating
light lines uniformly illuminated by means of a diffuser. FLOODLINE provides uniform illumination of vertical areas (wallwashing).
individual slot channel diffuser* installation installation installation DECOLINE IP 40 • • • • DECOLINE IP 65 • • FLOODLINE IP 40 • • • FLOODLINE IP 65 • * In DECOLINE IP 40, the diffuser is clipped onto the LED module. For DECOLINE IP 65, modules are supplied optionally with transparent or diffuse optic.
The Lighting Handbook
SYSTEMLED Deco: Clip-on diffuser for perfect uniformity.
SYSTEMLED Deco Basic: Easy to install in the cove thanks to ready-to-connect modules inc. connecting cables.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 59
ORILED â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Orientation lighting close to ground level with LED
In emergency cases, too, additional escape route lighting is ensured via a central battery or 1 h/3 h separate battery packs. The luminaires with IP 65 protection can be used for a broad range of applications. A variety of accessories is available for easy luminaire installation.
ORILED Functional: light distribution at ground level
60 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
ORILED Functional is fitted with an LED optic (patent pending) that provides illuminance in conformity with the EN 1838 standard. ORILED Decorative, with its warm or blue light colour, is used in areas where the focus is on a decorative lighting effect. By using different control gear, the luminaires can be easily integrated into building management systems such as LUXMATE or the ONLITE emergency lighting system.
Besides its two 1 W LEDs, the secret of ORILEDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s excellent illuminance is, in particular, its reflector combined with its unique lens optic.
By means of flexible mounting brackets, the luminaires are fixed in the wall cut-out, bollard, or in the surface-mounted housing, mounting frame or casting surround.
The Lighting Handbook
The stainless steel frame is fixed to the luminaire housing via CAMLOCK fasteners. ORILED therefore has no visible screw heads.
Bollard with recessed 350 mA luminaire
Recessed housing with flushfitted luminaire
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 61
HELISSA – Stylish appearance with individuality for indoor and outdoor areas The decorative HELISSA wall/ceiling mounted luminaire with protection types IP 40 and IP 65 sets both indoor and outdoor areas masterfully centre stage while saving energy. In addition to round or square glare-free
optics, a discreet indirect light component creates a white or coloured lighting corona on the wall or ceiling. Emergency lighting and dimmable models, too, can be easily installed and maintained.
HELISSA round
HELISSA square
Application: – indoor areas such as corridors, stairs and waiting areas – applications in temporarily or permanently humid/damp environments (e.g. station concourses) – aggressive environments (chlorine or saline-contai-
ning environments, wellness areas) – outdoor areas around the house, entrance areas – public spaces All applications, from inside to outside, can be implemented in the same, highquality design using one luminaire range!
Model HELISSA IP 40
Size D/Q 360 D/Q 450
HELISSA IP 65
62 / Chapter 3
D/Q 360
Lamp(s) 2/9 W TC-SEL 1/22 W T16-R 1/55 W T16-R 2/18 W TC-L 1/22 W T16-R 2/18 W TC-DEL
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Models:
Benefits/pros: high-quality and efficient – optimum materials for the respective application area: – HELISSA IP 40: sheet steel fitting, rugged polycarbonate diffuser – HELISSA IP 65: die-cast aluminium fitting, frosted glass diffuser – glare-free and uniform illumination – high energy efficiency; compact/fluorescent lamps operated exclusively with electronic ballast convenient and versatile – easy installation – HELISSA IP 40: round fitting, diffuser unit (diffuser + aluminium frame) can be installed without tools thanks to twist and lock mechanism – HELISSA IP 65: round or square fitting with silicone seal and glass cover, cover frame is fixed without tools by means of CamLock fasteners
– concealed screws – decorative cover frame optionally in white, titanium or aluminium, brightly polished/with protective coating economically efficient and flexible – luminaires are optionally switchable or analog/digitally dimmable – models in all design sizes/ versions are available in the same design and size with built-in 1 h or 3 h emergency lighting unit – all components are accommodated in the fitting All these features give HELISSA its unmistakable individuality.
The Lighting Handbook
Accessories: Set of foil filters (red, blue, yellow) to create corona For more creative scope, the lighting corona’s colour can be changed by fitting foil filters.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 63
TECTON â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Continuous-row lighting system TECTON Compact
TECTON Retail
Design by Nicholas Grimshaw & Partners
64 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
TECTON-I Industry
TECTON provides flexibility Layout changes occur at ever shorter intervals in retail, business and industry, demanding maximum flexibility from any continuous-row lighting system. TECTON allows the luminaire modules to be placed anywhere on the trunking.
Technical alterations to the lighting can also be made on site, with 11-pole wiring allowing any modifications in terms of brightness control or emergency lighting supply in conformity with relevant standards.
TECTON saves on installation costs “The easier, the better”. The specially designed power conductor integrated in the trunking revolutionises installation, making TECTON both versatile and easy to handle. Not only does this save time, but lower qualified and hence cheaper staff can do the work.
All components can be combined logically and simply in the modular system, reducing TECTON installation costs by up to 60 percent through time savings, depending on the continuous row configuration chosen.
The Lighting Handbook
TECTON provides safety TECTON provides safety in several ways: – At the design stage, by the integration of mains lighting, emergency lighting and control; – By the clear separation of emergency and escape-sign luminaires in two emergency-lighting circuits;
– By the ONLITE emergency luminaire range that can be fully customized to the TECTON system for safety and reliability of the lighting solution in conformity with relevant standards.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 65
TECTON-H RBS The module for flexible lighting concepts: with the swivelling luminaire head, it is easy to respond to any changes in room layout. Thanks to wideangle lighting technology, retail islands can be created using directed light, also enabling optimum illumination of gondola heads.
TECTON-H RSR Making homogeneous illuminated areas and wall surfaces come alive: using lighting technology with asymmetrical distribution, it is possible to create lighting focuses and, for instance, precisely accentuate shelves.
TECTON-H R A high-pressure module that provides highlights: wide-angle or narrow-beam lighting technology strikingly emphasises seasonal and pallet goods using directional light, pinpointed and brilliant.
TECTON-H RSRA The surface-mounted model adds refreshing lighting accents for the illumination of counters and fresh goods. Light with asymmetrical distribution in combination with special accessories such as UVA, IR, meat and cold-meat filters makes the goods displayed appear delicious and tempting.
66 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
TECTON â&#x20AC;&#x201C; High-pressure modules for shops, hypermarkets and supermarkets
TECTON â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Decorative optics With its innovative darklight miniature cell louvre made of aluminised polycarbonate, the indirect/direct optic provides a new interpretation of ID lighting in a continuous-row lighting system. Featuring a 50 % indirect and 50 % direct light component, it is ideal for use in demanding office applications and at POS terminals in retail areas. The MELLOW LIGHT optic with its lighting chamber in diffuser pearl material and a slotted grid-mesh optic provides appropriately glarereduced light with visible luminance levels. Specific applications include prestigious and retail areas with high aesthetic requirements.
The Lighting Handbook
The wide-angle, purely indirect lighting characteristics of the indirect optic ensure uniformly illuminated ceilings, preferably in long corridor areas. Providing ambient lighting, it is also ideal for combination with accent lighting in retail areas.
The pool-light optic made of opal plastic impresses with harmonious, wide-area luminance levels on softly rounded surfaces. It is a perfect choice for wellness areas, sophisticated zonal lighting in retail areas, or cool ambient lighting at the bar.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 67
SOLINA – The new high-bay reflector luminaire The new SOLINA high-bay reflector luminaire boasts a striking cylindrical design, a relatively small height (34 cm), a die-cast aluminium housing (for the first time ever, direct and indirect lighting are combined in a high-bay reflector luminaire), and also includes a version for direct installation on the ceiling.
Design by Charles Keller
Benefits: – both lighting types, direct and indirect, can be separately switched and dimmed – same lamp and reflector range as COPA D – additionally reflector painted in titanium – one unit – variety of installation options (cord, pendant, chain, adapter) – direct installation on the ceiling – accessories: IP 54 glass cover, prismatic glass cover – 2 food filters (M/CM+IR) – 2 coloured indirect filters (red + blue) 68 / Chapter 3
– industrial lighting, as traditional high-bay reflector luminaire
– colour sequences possible via LED RGB combined with EMOTION touch panel or other DALI-controlled systems – colour sequences possible via LED RGB, as indirect lighting components – static colour situations possible via indirect colour filters in red and blue
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Application: – shop/retail, with focus on lighting fresh products – architecture-centred luminaire with ceiling illumination
One unit – a variety of mounting options: – cord – pendant – chain – adapter – direct installation on the ceiling
The Lighting Handbook
Installation benefits: – easy and simple installation, largely without tools – luminaire prewired, no-tool electrical installation on plug-in terminal in place – twist and lock mechanism makes closing luminaire easy
Models: – indirect lighting optionally: 22 W T-R 5, LED-RGB – direct lighting optionally: 42–57 W TC-TELI, 60–250 W QT 32, 70–150 W HIT, 85 W QL, 100 W HST
– reflectors: plastic reflector (translucent or painted in titanium), prismatic reflector and metal reflector (also available in titanium-painted finish)
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 69
PERLUCE – Closed lighting system with excellent maintenance factor Closed surface-mounted luminaire with increased protection type IP 50 (IP 54) PERLUCE Opal – optional colour accents – excellent light output ratio – uniform, fully flexible light emission – smooth surfaces, easy to clean – excellent maintenance factor
Application: – louvre: for high visual requirements in rooms where dust and dirt are present, e. g. workshops, laboratories, kitchens, classrooms and nursery schools
70 / Chapter 3
– opal: circulation areas, staircases, waiting rooms, wellness areas, changing rooms, nursery schools and canteens
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
PERLUCE louvre – first closed surface-mounted louvre luminaire available on the market – optional colour accents – excellent light output ratio – suitable for high visual requirements – maintenance factor better than in open louvre luminaires – smooth surfaces, easy to clean – lamp and louvre protected against soiling Design by Studio Ambrozus
Lighting technology: – T16 technology with electronic ballast – louvre: Bivergence plus – darklight louvre, reduced luminance levels of L < 1000 cd/m2 at 65°, UGR < 19 or < 16 acc. to EN 12464; ceiling brightened up by laterally perforated upper reflector – opal: opal optic, UGR < 22 or < 25 acc. to EN 12464
Quality: – 1-lamp and 2-lamp models in same housing – excellent light output ratio and homogeneous illumination of luminaire – injection-moulded optic (generally thin luminaire walls) – high stability of optic – end-to-end installation without gaps – luminaries can be opened easily, even when mounted end to end
Models:
The Lighting Handbook
PERLUCE linear PERLUCE wallwasher PERLUCE square Opal/louvre Opal 1/14 W T16 (IP 50) 1/35 W T16 (IP 54) 2/18 W TC-L (IP 50/54) 1/24 W T16 (IP 50) 1/49 W T16 (IP 54) 4/14 W TC-L (IP 50/54) 1/28 W T16 (IP 50) 1/35 W T16 (IP 50/54) 1/80 W T16 (IP 54) 1/49 W T16 (IP 50/54) 1/54 W T16 (IP 50/54) 2/35 W T16 (IP 54) 1/80 W T16 (IP 50/54) 2/49 W T16 (IP 54) 2/14 W T16 (IP 50) 2/28 W T16 (IP 50) 2/35 W T16 (IP 50) 2/49 W T16 (IP 50/54) Protection type Protection type Protection type IP 50 standard IP 54 standard IP 50 standard (IP 54) (IP 54)
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 71
SCUBA – Moisture-proof diffuser luminaire with impressive problem-solving skills Moisture-proof diffuser luminaire boasting impressive problem-solving skills (SCII, PC, PMMA, CHEMO diffuser, plastic catches, 15° slope, high-temperature and lowtemperature versions) and a unique, innovative design language (oval, aerodynamic), in various IP 65 applications (dust-proof and jet-proof). Materials use are optionally PC, PMMA, CHEMO for diffusers, and polyester (GRP) for the basic housing. SCUBA is the successor of FZ and IFP, and stands for impact resist-
Designed by Massimo Iosa Ghini
S
Shockproof
C
Chemically resistant
U
UV-stable
B
Benefit-orientated
A
Application-orientated
ance, chemical resistance, UVstability, user-friendliness and application-orientation.
Benefits: – unique, innovative design – smooth/ergonomic surfaces language and catches – high light output ratio thanks – 15° slope of all visible surto calculated, optimised prisfaces (recommended for food matic structure industry) – innovative sealing rim between – optionally with heavy-duty electronic ballast for longer basic housing and diffuser service life at high ambient – special CHEMO diffuser temperatures (combines benefits of PC and PMMA)
Special designs (available upon request): SCII, hightemperature, low-temperature, 72 / Chapter 3
emergency lighting, heavyduty electronic ballast, plastic catches, halogen-free wiring
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Product range with PC, PMMA or CHEMO diffuser: T26 1-/2-lamp 18 W electr. ballast, low-loss ballast; 684 mm T26 1-/2-lamp 36 W electr. ballast, low-loss ballast; 1,294 mm T26 1-/2-lamp 58 W electr. ballast, low-loss ballast; 1,594 mm T16 1-/2-lamp 28/35/49 W; 1,294 mm/1,594 mm T16 1-lamp 54/80 W; 1,294 mm/1,594 mm
Properties of diffuser materials: Polycarbonate (PC) – UV-stabilised – extremely impact-resistant – chemically resistant, to a limited extent Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA) – 100 % UV-resistant – good chemical resistance – impact absorbing UV-resistance
CHEMO – extremely UV-resistant, comparable to PMMA – substantial resistance to a large number of chemicals – impact resistance similar to PC
Yellowness Index 30 25 20 15 10 5
PC with UV-stabiliser PMMA and CHEMO
0
Weathering time (months)
60
80
100
120
Heavy-duty electronic ballasts The PC industry product range was specially designed for use in harsh industrial environments. All
T16 and T26 models ensure a long service life, even under tough environmental conditions.
Comparison of service life of a PC industry ballast compared with a standard electronic ballast, taking the SCUBA luminaire as an example Reliability
SCUBA + standard electronic ballast
SCUBA with PC industry: same service life at higher temperature
SCUBA with PC industry: double service life at the same temperature
90 %
95 %
100 %
The Lighting Handbook
0
10,000
20,000
30,000
Standard electronic ballast 1/58 W, at 38 °C max. 2/58 W, at 32 °C max. 1/36 W, at 47 °C max. 2/36 W, at 35 °C max.
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
PC industry 1/58 W, at 50 °C max. 2/58 W, at 45 °C max. 1/36 W, at 59 °C max. 2/36 W, at 47 °C max.
90,000
100,000
service life (h)
PC industry 1/58 W, at 38 °C max. 2/58 W, at 32 °C max. 1/36 W, at 47 °C max. 2/36 W, at 35 °C max.
Measured values refer to ambient temperature, without through-wiring. Subtract 7 °C in case of through-wiring.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 73
CLEAN – Three-level luminaire concept for clean-rooms CLEAN – an overview
CLEAN Supreme CLEAN Advanced CLEAN Classic
Designs Installation Protection type type Square Linear Usable space Ceiling Surface• IP 65 IP 65 mounted •
•
Recessed
IP 65
IP 54
•
•
Recessed
IP 54
IP 20
All luminaires boast a highquality surface finish resistant to cleaning agents and Application: In healthcare settings – operating theatres – laboratories – air locks – intensive care units – emergency wards – examination and treatment rooms – recovery rooms – hallway and corridor areas – administrative areas – laundries and kitchens – doctors’ surgeries – healthcare and rehabilitation centres
74 / Chapter 3
disinfectants, and have been given the ENEC mark for their rugged, durable design.
In industry and engineering – electronics – electrical engineering – micromechanics – biogenetics – pharmaceutical and chemical companies – laboratory technology – genetic engineering – food technology – extremely critical areas of food production – food industry – hallway and corridor areas – laundries and large-scale catering establishments
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Model
CLEAN Supreme – IPA certificate for clean-room compatibility in clean-rooms in Classes 3 to 9 (ISO), issued by the Fraunhofer Institute – antistatic surface finish – frameless, continuous glass diffuser – trouble-free operation in rooms with positive and negative pressure containment systems thanks to special valve system – easy installation of luminaires, convenient relamping CLEAN Advanced – IPA certificate for clean-room compatibility in clean-rooms in Classes 3 to 9 (ISO), issued by the Fraunhofer Institute – cover made of anodised aluminium – models with toughened safety glass or shatter-proof PMMA acrylic glass – trouble-free operation in rooms with positive and negative pressure containment systems thanks to special valve system – extremely resistant materials – easy installation of luminaires, and high-quality workmanconvenient relamping ship
The Lighting Handbook
CLEAN Classic – cover made of anodised aluminium – model with PMMA acrylic glass – extremely resistant materials and high-quality workmanship
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 75
ZBOX – Plug&Play Lighting control system for hotels, private dwellings and shops
ZBOX-Controller: W: 372 mm H: 372 mm D: 60 mm
ZBOX-Cxx: W: 86 mm H: 86 mm D 11 mm
Intuitive: – clear design layout and functions of control units – self-explanatory symbols
– control concept completely focused on guest – “ZBOX does what guests expect”
Emotion: – lighting scenes – dynamism and controlled colour changes
– day and night scenes (networked with Luxmate add-on module: radio-controlled clock)
Safety: – emergency lighting can be – “crash channel” provides integrated light if controller fails – ZUMTOBEL ONLITE separate – quick and easy replacement, battery luminaires – preferably no special skills required NT3 versions with central moni- – dimmer with autoprotect toring in case of networking facility (overload protection for lighting loads) 76 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Plug&Play – pre-addressed and pre-programmed for hotel rooms – plug-in connections – locally as stand-alone system, or networked with Luxmate bus – web tool for fine adjustment – no licence, no special skills required, no experts needed – direct connection via Ethernet (TCP/IP) – transparency of costs from design through to operation – can be upgraded using standard Luxmate bus components – 4 control points included – no addressing of luminaires, except for RGBW (DALI Broadcast)
Main functions: – scenes and individual adjustment – special control concept – functions adjustable via ZBOX.WEBTOOL – mains cut-off device – backup function with SD card (under development) – ZBOX.NIGHTLOGIC day/night scenes (various scenes are called up depending on the time of day)
The Lighting Handbook
Technical data: – 8 x output (300 W) – switchable via relay – dimmable via DALI Broadcast (all electronic ballasts connected are dimmed simultaneously; no DALI addressing; max. of 10 DALI loads) – slot for 300 VA universal dimmer (20–300 VA; 0 ... 100 %) – 1 x output (300 W) for RGBW control of wellness luminaire (DALI group numbers 1– 4; max. 16 DALI loads) – 1 x output for 1 blinds/ curtain motor 230 V-AC Energy loss: – ZBOX Controller: light on 10 W (no dimmer), light off 1 W (stand-alone = full standby) 4.5 W (networked = half standby)
Pros: – energy savings – through lighting scenes at reduced cost lighting levels savings – operating costs – dimming increases service life of incandescent lamps longer maintenance cycles cost savings – fast – thanks to pre-addressing and plug-in connectors – do it yourself using the ZBOX.WEBTOOL – package optimised for workflow on site
– 5 x input for DALI ZBOX Circle control unit – multiple allocation (e.g. 1 x left bed + 1 x right bed + 2 x room + 2 x bathroom + 2 x hall) – 2 x input “Key Card” and “Aux” – 230 V-AC, potentialfree – 1 x Luxmate bus connection (1 bus load) – 1 x RJ45 Ethernet LAN connection for web tool and service – 1 x SD card for backup/ restore (under development)
– ZBOX DIMMER300: light on 0.7 W
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 77
ONLITE escape sign and emergency luminaires – Combining design and functionality All ONLITE escape sign luminaires are based on first-class lighting technology. This ensures that pictograms are uniformly illuminated at a minimum luminance level of 200 cd/m2.
An attractive design and the use of high-quality materials guarantee not only maximum functionality and reliability, but also pleasant, unobtrusive integration with the interior design.
Each ONLITE escape sign can be supplied via three different systems. The respective type of supply is indicated by the luminaire’s name:
NSI Supplied via LPS system (communication via Power Line)
NT 1/3 Separate battery supply with auto test and control test function (1 and 3 h stand-alone time)
DALI Supplied via CPS system (communication via DALI)
230 V AC
DALI control line SB 128 Controller
78 / Chapter 3
NT 1/3 control test DALI bus connected: luminaires centrally monitored – individual configuration/ monitoring of luminaires – minimum testing effort – fully automatic test log book – max. functional reliability
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
NT 1/3 auto test – no DALI bus connected – fixed test cycle programmes are run automatically, displayed via bicoloured LED – low installation effort
230 V AC
NSI – supply via LPS Communication with luminaires with PLC (power line control) via supply line. All luminaires can be individually controlled and monitored. – maximum intrinsic safety thanks to self-contained systems – easy maintenance – low installation effort – reduced fire load – can be fully integrated into lighting management system
The Lighting Handbook
DALI – supplied via CPS Supply via CPS, diesel generator or 2nd mains. Monitored via DALI interface. – every DALI luminaire can be used as an emergency luminaire – minimum maintenance effort – interference-free data communication – no installation of additional monitoring modules in luminaires required – security function of final circuit (makes sure that luminaires can be switched on reliably if communication line is defective)
Design by Matteo Thun with Lutz Büsing www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 79
ONLITE RESCLITE – A world champion in terms of lighting technology and energy efficiency With a Power LED and three sophisticated optics, RESCLITE paves the way to a new era of emergency lighting. – Ideal light distribution thanks to optimum illumination. Only a very small number of luminaires are required for emergency lighting in conformity with relevant standards. – Minimum energy consumption and maximum installed load of 5 W. Power input in non-maintained mode approx. 1.5 W. This means that only very small-scale supply and cable systems are needed.
– Minimum design effort. Completely independent from general lighting. The only design work needed is the placing of spacing tables. – Extremely easy to install and maintain. Standard installation terminals for throughwiring up to 2.5 mm². Strain relief devices and covers fixed without tools ensure quick, straightforward installation.
Mounting options Recessed into ceiling
Surface-mounted on ceiling
80 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
TECTON continuous-row lighting system
RESCLITE escape LED emergency luminaire for escape route lighting according to EN 1838
Mounting height in m h 2.2 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
h
Max. spacing (m) wall/luminaire a1 b1 5.9 5.7 6.4 6.1 7.1 6.7 8.1 7.4 7.5 2.3
Max. spacing (m) luminaire/luminaire a2 b2 13.4 12.9 14.6 14.0 16.4 15.7 19.5 18.5 22.0 19.9
a2 b2
a1 b1
a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and central battery (NSI, DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3))
The Lighting Handbook
– Width of escape route: 2 m – Minimum illuminance across width 1 m: 1 lx – Uniformity higher than 40 : 1 – Maintenance factor considered: 0.8
– Reflection factors: 0 – Complies with glare reduction acc. to EN 1838
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 81
RESCLITE anti-panic LED emergency luminaire for anti-panic lighting according to EN 1838
Mounting height in m h 2.2 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
Max. spacing (m) wall/luminaire a1 b1 3.4 3.1 3.5 3.1 3.2 2.6 1.5 0.9 0.9 0.7
– rotationally symmetrical distribution – minimum illuminance: 0.5 lx – Uniformity higher than 40 : 1 – maintenance factor considered: 0,8 h
a2 b2
a1 b1
a2 b2
a1 b1
Max. spacing (m) luminaire/luminaire a2 b2 9.3 8.9 10.1 9.5 11.1 10.5 12.9 11.6 12.4 10.4
– Reflection factors: 0 – Complies with glare reduction acc. to EN 1838
a1 b1
a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and via central battery (NSI, DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3)
82 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
a2 b2
RESCLITE spot LED emergency luminaire for increased illuminance levels acc. to EN 1838
Min. illuminance level of 5 lx s for first-aid, fire-fighting and reporting facilities:
Mounting height in m h 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
Ø of light cone in m Øa Øb 2.4 2.1 2.7 2.3 3.0 2.7 2.8 –
– rotationally symmetrical distri- – reflection factors: 0 bution – complies with glare reduc– minimum illuminance: 5 lx tion acc. to EN 1838 – maintenance factor considered: 0,8
h
Ø a, b
The Lighting Handbook
Ø a, b
a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and via central battery (NSI, DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3)
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 83
84 / Chapter 3
LED
LED
IP 20
IP 40
The Lighting Handbook
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
COMSIGN
IP 65 1)
T16 8 W IP 20 410 Lm
PROOFSIGN LED LED
cs
cs
cs
cs
cVs
28 m 3) 15 m 4)
20 m 3)
15 m 3) 7.6 m 5)
15 m 3)
SurfaceLight Protection Protection Recognition mounted Pendant- Cord Wallclass range source type on ceiling mounted suspension mounted
ERGOSIGN T16 8 W IP 40 410 Lm
ARTSIGN
RESCLITE
Type
90째 wallmounted
Recessed TECTON
ONLITE LOOK product overview
CUBESIGN TC-DEL IP 40 1/26 W
cs
90 m 3) 45 m 4)
wcs
T16 8 W IP 65 1) 410 Lm
ECOSIGN safety
3)
30 m 3) 15 m 4)
28 m 3) 15 m 4)
32 m wcs 16 m 4)
cs
cs
T16 8 W IP 65 1) 410 Lm
IP 40
IP 20
ECOSIGN
PURESIGN LED
COMSIGN II LED
The Lighting Handbook
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 85
3) acc. to EN 1838 and DIN 4844
1) with cable feed only 2) reduced to IP 40
2) 4) lt. VkF and SN EN 1838 (model for CH) 5) narrow side if mounted on the ceiling
2)
2)
BELIA – Single-bed luminaire Living-room ambience for medically used rooms As a single-bed luminaire that can optionally be fitted with supply modules, BELIA provides precise examination lighting for care personnel and glare-free reading light for patients, giving them a feeling of privacy. Multifunctional types of lighting and innovative longitudinal glare control provide ample evidence of BELIA’s efficiency and photometric qualities. Design by NPK Industrial Design
Designs: – single-bed luminaire with 580 mm mounting channel for flush integration of safety sockets, call system, telecommunication and data sockets
86 / Chapter 3
– rehabilitation centres and nursing homes – homes for the elderly
– optional connection to medical supply systems, if medical gases are needed, for instance.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
Application: – medically used rooms without high supply requirements
One luminaire â&#x20AC;&#x201C; four lighting scenes:
Examination lighting
Reading light
Night lighting
The Lighting Handbook
100
Room lighting
L (reading light + room lighting): 1090 mm, 1390 mm L (plus night lighting): 1200 mm, 1500 mm
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
188
Chapter 3 / 87
TETTOIA – Medical supply unit Flexibility in a pleasantly smooth design TETTOIA boasts plenty of scope for action. Thanks to three independent lighting elements, the direct/indirect luminaire provides perfect light for any situation – at the press of a button and featuring convenient reset mechanisms. This means that both patient and doctor are provided with perfect convenience. Colours for the basic unit and lighting dormer can be chosen personally, the supply components are flexibly integrated. Design by NPK Industrial Design Application: – medically used rooms wit high supply requirements – patient rooms
– nursing rooms
162
228
88 / Chapter 3
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
The Lighting Handbook
60
– optional supply of mainspower components, communication and data sockets, medical gases
32
128
Modular systems: – supply unit boasts flexibility in terms of both design and technology – built-in lighting unit for general, reading, examination and night lighting
One luminaire â&#x20AC;&#x201C; four lighting scenes:
Room lighting
Examination lighting
Reading light
Night lighting
Prismatic diffuser for glare-free room lighting, easy-to-clean closed designs.
The Lighting Handbook
Freedom of choice for colours of basic unit and lighting dormer.
Supply components can be installed on the front and also on the underside.
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Chapter 3 / 89
Chapter 4
Lamps and ballasts Lamp selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The main lamp types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application notes, T16 fluorescent lamps . . . . . . . . . . . A comparison of fluorescent lamps – T16/T26 . . . . . . . Application notes, compact fluorescent lamps . . . . . . . Application notes, metal halide lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 + 400 W . . . Lamp descriptions acc. to LBS (ZVEI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristic values of the major lamps . . . . . . . . . . . Energy efficiency of luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of electronic ballasts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption, energy savings, required power . . Overview of LED control gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 3–4 5 – 10 11 – 14 15 16 – 17 18 19 – 20 21 – 23 24 – 28 29 30 31 32 – 36
Choosing the right lamp – An important first decision Choosing the right lamp depends on what is required of the lighting (see Chapter 2). For instance, incandescent lamps are still the most popular lighting option used in domestic areas to help create that cosy atmosphere. However, these lamps generate only little light, apart from having a short service life. Therefore, despite their low purchase price, energy-efficient and environmentally compatible alternatives must be used increasingly in the future. In other situations, users happily tolerate the higher purchase price of discharge lamps because their high luminous efficiency and long lifetime make them economic. Thus it is part of the expertise of the lighting designer to find the most suitable lamp for a lighting task. Lamp characteristics can essentially be specified by the following key terms:
Drop in luminous flux
Lamp power
Service life
Light colour
Lamp characteristics
Warm-up time
Colour rendition
Burning position
Re-start time
Dimming capability
The Lighting Handbook
Luminous flux/ efficiency
Lamp characteristics 1. Power The electrical power consumption of the lamp as opposed to the power consumption of a system comprising lamp and ballast. 2. Luminous flux/luminous efficiency The luminous flux specifies the total amount of light generated by a lamp. The rated luminous flux is measured at a standardised measurement temperature of 25 째C in units of lumen [lm]. The ratio of luminous flux to electrical power consumption gives the luminous efficiency [lm/W]. The system luminous efficiency also includes the power consumption of the ballast. 3. Service life The average service life is normally specified, being the time by which statistically half the lamps are still working (mortality), or half the lamps have failed. This test is subject to standardised operating conditions. Lamp manufacturers display this failure rate by curves. In Chapter 8, they are shown as maintenance factors (LSF). 4. Drop in luminous flux The initial luminous flux of a new lamp decreases over its time of operation (lumen maintenance), due to the ageing of its chemical and physical components. Lamp manufacturers display this drop in luminous flux by curves. In Chapter 8, they are shown as maintenance factors (LLWF).
The Lighting Handbook
5. Light colour The light colour describes the colour impression made by a white light source as relatively warm (ww = warm) or relatively cool (nw = intermediate, tw = cool). It is affected by the red and blue colour components in the spectrum. 6. Colour rendition The spectral components of the light determine how well various object colours can be reproduced. The higher the colour rendition index (Ra or CRI), or the lower the colour rendition group number, the better the colour rendition in comparison with the optimum reference light.
Chapter 4 / 3
7. Warm-up time Discharge lamps in particular need between 30 seconds and several minutes to warm up and output the full luminous flux. 8. Re-start High-pressure discharge lamps need to cool down for several minutes before they can be started again. 9. Dimming capability Besides incandescent and halogen incandescent lamps, nowadays all fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps can also be dimmed over almost any range. Metal halide lamps, however, are still not approved by the manufacturers for dimming, because this may have uncontrollable effects on light quality and lamp service life. The new series of special models for indoor and outdoor applications constitute an exception. The power of highpressure sodium- and mercury-vapour lamps can be varied, but only in discrete levels.
4 / Chapter 4
The Lighting Handbook
10. Burning position Manufacturers specify the permitted burning positions for their lamps. For some metal halide lamps, only certain burning positions are allowed so as to avoid unstable operating states. Compact fluorescent lamps may usually be used in any burning position; however, important properties such as the luminous flux vs. temperature curve may vary with the position.
The main lamp types
QT12
QR111
H a l o g e n
l a m p s
QR-CBC
QT32
QT-DE
QPAR51
QPAR64
Halogen lamps – For mains and low-voltage – Brilliant light operation – Excellent colour rendition – Longer service life and – Applications: retail higher luminous efficiency and domestic areas, than incandescent lamps restaurants and – Easy to dim catering
The Lighting Handbook
How they work Current flows through a filament and heats it up, just as in incandescent lamps. These lamps therefore generate a relatively large amount of heat. The halogen cycle increases the efficiency and extends the service life compared with traditional incandescent lamps. Low-voltage types are very small and are ideal for precise direction of light, but do require a transformer.
Chapter 4 / 5
l a m p s F l u o re s c e n t
T16/T26
T16-R
Fluorescent lamps – High to very high luminous efficiency (in particular T16 HE) – Good to excellent colour rendition
T16-R
– Long service life – Extensive range of types – Dimmable – Application: economically efficient widearea lighting
TC-DEL
TC-TEL(I)
TC-TEL(I)
TC-L
Compact fluorescent lamps – Compact designs – Applications: commer– High luminous efficiency cial and high-profile – Excellent colour rendition interiors, restaurants – Extensive range of types and catering – Dimmable How they work These lamps are compact versions of the linear or circular fluorescent lamps, and operate in a very similar way. The luminous flux depends on the burning position and temperature.
6 / Chapter 4
The Lighting Handbook
C o m p a c t
f l u o re s c e n t
l a m p s
How they work An alternating electric field generates invisible UV radiation between the two electrodes in the discharge tube. This radiation is converted into high-quality visible light in the fluorescent material. The lamps need a starting aid and a current limiting device, usually combined in an electronic ballast. The luminous flux is highly dependent on the ambient temperature.
lamps halide Metal
HIT-TC-CE
HIT-CE
HIT-DE-CE
Metal halide lamps – High luminous efficiency – Good to excellent colour rendition – High colour stability for ceramic discharge-tube lamps
HIT-DE
HIE
HIT
– Cannot be dimmed – Applications: industrial bays, spotlighting, floodlighting, retail areas
How they work In metal halide lamps, a highly compact electric arc is produced in a discharge tube. The composition of the materials in the tube determines the light quality.
The Lighting Handbook
A starter is needed to switch on the lamp, and the current must be limited by a ballast. Practical electronic ballasts are also available for low-power lamps.
Chapter 4 / 7
S o d i u m
va p o u r
l a m p s
Sodium vapour lamps – High luminous efficiency and long service life – Satisfactory to poor colour rendition – Can be dimmed in discrete steps – Applications: industrial bays, street lighting HST-CRI
HSE
HST
Colour-improved (Philips SDW): – Excellent colour rendition – Warm light
– Long service life – Application: retail areas
Mercury vapour lamps – No starter, just ballast required – Satisfactory to poor colour rendition – Can be dimmed in discrete steps – Applications: industrial bays, street lighting HME
How they work The high-pressure mercury vapour lamp is actually the forerunner to the modern metal halide lamp, although it provides a far poorer light quality. The lamps can be started at mains voltage, and so only need a ballast for current limiting.
8 / Chapter 4
The Lighting Handbook
Mercury vapour lamps
How they work The discharge in the linearly extended ceramic discharge tube is defined by sodium, so the light is yellowish and only suitable for special applications. The colour-improved SDW lamp by Philips is a popular choice for lighting retail areas. A starter is usually needed to switch on the lamp, and the current must be limited by a ballast.
I n d u c t i o n
l a m p s
LMG-IHf
QL – By Philips only – 55 W, 85 W and 165 W – Excellent colour rendition – Very long service life – Rotationally symmetrical light distribution
– Applications: areas where it is difficult to replace lamps; commercial and industrial interiors, retail, indoor and outdoor public areas
How they work A high-frequency electromagnetic field is coupled into the glass bulb via an antenna protruding into the bulb. This produces UV radiation which is then converted into visible light by fluorescent material, just as in fluorescent lamps.
The Lighting Handbook
The amalgam technology used in these lamps makes their luminous flux only very slightly temperature-dependent. The lamps can only be operated using special electronic ballasts by Philips. Systems have a very long service life because the only parts subject to wear are in these ballasts. As yet there are no dimmable electronic ballasts available.
Chapter 4 / 9
Wire bond Bubble LED chip Board
Light emitting diodes (LEDs) – Each manufacturer uses own technology – Highly efficient direct generation of coloured light – Huge potential as the light source of the future
– Applications: decorative indoor and outdoor applications, escape sign luminaires, visual guidance systems, innovative lighting solutions, backlighting of advertising signs, showcase and shelf lighting
How they work Light emitting diodes are modern semiconductor devices. Their properties are determined by the materials used as well as the mechanical design. The active semiconductor layer, in which radiation is produced, is sandwiched between a positive and a negative substrate. Depending on the materials used, a large variety of different colours are produced directly. White light can only be produced using fluorescent materials from blue LEDs or by mixing RGB. Today, the smallest chips have a side length of approx. 250 μm (1 micrometre = 1 one-thousandth of a millimetre). LED modules are supplied with power via appropriate converters with safety extra-low voltage. They can be dimmed easily. The LEDs’ very long service life of several 10,000 hours can only be achieved when overheating is avoided (thermal management). Rapid increases in efficiency at a simultaneous fall in prices open up bright perspectives for the future.
10 / Chapter 4
The Lighting Handbook
L i g h t
e m i t t i n g
d i o d e s
( L E D s )
LED (EOS P214 by TRIDONIC.ATCO)
Application notes T16 fluorescent lamps In comparison with thicker T26 lamps (diameter: 26 mm), modern T16 lamps (diameter: 16 mm) show several different properties that must be taken into account for application. 1. Luminous flux – temperature curve As for all fluorescent lamps, the lamp’s luminous flux is temperature-dependent. The maximum value is obtained at an optimum ambient temperature, with losses increasing at higher and lower temperatures. The T16 basically follows the same curve as the T26, but the maximum occurs not at an ambient temperature of 20 to 25 °C but at about 35 °C. Reason: The cool spot of T16 is not located in the centre of the lamp, but typically at one end of the tube where the manufacturer has fixed its seal. The rated luminous flux is generally specified for an ambient temperature of 25 °C. For the T16, the maximum value therefore lies above this rated value. Thus luminaire efficiencies may have levels greater than “1”. % 100 80
T26 58 W
60
T16
40 T26 36 W
20
-20
0
20
40
60
80 °C
The Lighting Handbook
Ambient temperature
Chapter 4 / 11
2. CSO – Cool Spot Optimizer The photometric data of luminaires typically apply to a standard temperature of 25 °C. Where a different ambient temperature prevails, the lamps’ luminous flux is also affected. In fluorescent lamps, the luminous flux declines in particular at lower temperatures. In order to increase the efficiency of luminaires fitted with T16 lamps, the so-called Cool Spot Optimizer (CSO) may be used.
The CSO effects a temperature increase at the lamp by approx. 10 to 20 degrees, resulting in a corresponding shift to the left of the T16 curve displayed (page 11).
Example: FZ 1/54 without CSO at 0 °C FZ 1/54 with CSO at 0 °C
LB approx. 60 % LB approx. 90 %
12 / Chapter 4
The Lighting Handbook
In the above example, the luminous flux produced is therefore increased by 50 % and the number of luminaires required is reduced by one third, owing to the CSO. For lighting design purposes, an appropriately adjusted planned luminous flux has to be calculated. The CSO may only be used in conventional T16 28/54 W and/or 35/49/80 W lamps using cold-spot technology, and must be fitted at the lamp end (see picture).
3. Ageing/burning in Brand new lamps stabilise during the ageing phase. This is the period immediately after the lamps are switched on for the first time, when the initially encapsulated mercury is vaporised and evenly distributed in the lamp. To ensure perfect operation, one should allow a period of 2 to 4 days of operation without dimming or switching, particularly in dimming installations. Unstabilised lamps may differ in brightness and light colour, even exhibiting flickering at low dimming levels. This may have a negative impact on the lamp service life. Also, before assessing a lighting installation’s illuminance level and lighting quality using already aged lamps, these should be burnt in over a minimum period of 30–60 minutes without dimming or switching them.
4. Lamp orientation Owing to the two electrodes (tube ends) not being identical in design, it matters how one or more lamps are fitted in the luminaires. In general, lamp ends should always have the same orientation i.e. in multi-lamp luminaires they should lie next to each other, and where lamps are positioned vertically, they should preferably also be at the bottom. For cool environments, it may make sense – depending on the type of luminaire – to arrange the lamp/s differently.
single-lamp
multi-lamp
normal ambient temperature
The Lighting Handbook
cool ambient temperature
Chapter 4 / 13
Further details for TETRIS and continuous row arrangements: Particular attention is needed for special lamp arrangements like in TETRIS (TECTON or SLOT luminaires) or in continous-row lighting systems. The so-called TETRIS arrangement provides for lamps overlapping several centimetres. This enables to compensate for the dark zone at the lampâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s ends. In order to provide for maximum uniformity, it is recommended to also align all lamps identically. The last lamp/s, however, should be turned so as to make the lamp end head towards the centre of the luminaire.
single-lamp
twin-lamp
single- and twin-lamp 14 / Chapter 4
single- and twin-lamp
The Lighting Handbook
In a continous-row lighting system, the maximum total luminous flux will be achieved if the lamp ends are placed next to each other, if possible. For cool environments, here too it may make sense to arrange the lamp/s differently.
A comparison of fluorescent lamps – T16/T26 Advantages of T16 fluorescent lamps – Reduction in the lamp diameter by about 40 % – Higher optical efficiencies possible – Improved luminous efficiency – Improved luminaire efficiencies from the shift in the luminous-flux peak – Standardised luminance levels for all lamp lengths for high-efficiency lamps – Larger range of types makes it easier to meet lighting requirements more closely Summary type comparison (selection): T16 Length Power Rated luminous flux (25 °C) 549 mm 14 W 1200 lm 24 W 1750 lm 849 mm 21 W 1900 lm 39 W 3100 lm 1149 mm 28 W 2600 lm 54 W 4450 lm 1449 mm 35 W 3300 lm 49 W 4300 lm 80 W 6150 lm
T26 Length Power Rated luminous flux (25 °C) 590 mm 18 W 1350 lm 895 mm 30 W
2350 lm
1200 mm 36 W
3350 lm
1500 mm 58 W
5200 lm
The Lighting Handbook
Example of interior lighting using T16 and T26 Room dimensions: length = 8 m, width = 6 m, height = 3 m Reflection factors: ceiling = 70 %, walls = 50 %, floor = 20 % Required maintenance value of illuminance: 500 lx Option 1: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire, matt louvre, 2/36 W electr. ballast Option 2: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire, matt louvre, 2/28 W electr. ballast Option 1 2/36 W Number of luminaires 8 Max. lamp luminous efficiency 93 lm/W Power consumption per m2 per 100 lx 2.2 W/m2/100 lx Luminaire efficiency 85 % Utilization factor 66 % Energy saving
Option 2 2/28 W 8 104 lm/W 2.0 W/m2/100 lx 91 % 73 % 10 %
Chapter 4 / 15
Application notes Compact fluorescent lamps 1. Amalgam lamps The strong temperature dependence of the luminous flux of traditional fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps can be compensated by adding amalgam (mercury compound). This helps to somewhat mitigate the sharp drop at higher or lower temperatures, ensuring that more than 90 % of the maximum luminous flux is achieved over a wide temperature range of approx. +5 to +70 °C. Above and below this range, however, the light level still falls off sharply. The tables provide an overview of those major manufacturers’ lamps in the TC-T design (three-fold double tube) that have added amalgam. Other amalgam without amalgam TC-T, TC-TE models can be 13 W 18 W 26 W 32 W 42 W 57 W found in the Osram 2-pin DULUX T • • • T16 and TC-L Osram 4-pin designs. DULUX T/E • • • • • Philips 2-pin PL-T 2p Philips 4-pin PL-T 4p GE 2-pin BIAX T Sylvania 2-pin Lynx CF-T
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
with amalgam TC-TI, TC-TELI, TC-QELI 13 W 18 W 26 W 32 W 42 W 57 W 60 W 70 W 85 W 120 W Osram 2-pin DULUX T IN Osram 4-pin DULUX T/E IN DULUX HO CONSTANT Philips 2-pin PL-T TOP 2p
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
•
•
•
•
•
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Lighting Handbook
16 / Chapter 4
•
•
Philips 4-pin PL-T TOP 4p PL-H GE 4-pin BIAX T/E BIAX Q/E Sylvania 4-pin Lynx CF-TE
•
The Lighting Handbook
2. Lamp orientation The luminous flux from compact fluorescent lamps is highly dependent on the burning position. Luminaire efficiency can be maximised by fitting the lamps properly in the luminaires. Standard types have a cool spot in the exposed lamp bend, so that self-heating and convection may lead to a temperature rise here. In amalgam lamps, the cool spot lies in the lamp base. In compact luminaires with horizontal lamp arrangement (e.g. downlights), it is therefore recommended to fit the lamps with electrodes uppermost wherever possible. Since the lamp end does not allow consistent identification of the electrode position, that lamp side on which adjacent tubes are not connected should be placed uppermost â&#x20AC;&#x201C; these are the two tube ends containing the internal electrodes. The exception to this is the PHILIPS PL-T, in which the electrodes are arranged diagonally. Either possible orientation of these lamps is equivalent.
Chapter 4 / 17
Application notes Metal halide lamps 1. Ballasts The manufacturers of metal halide lamps use a range of operating principles, resulting in different electrical operating values. Some lamps are therefore approved for operation both with ballasts for metal halide lamps (e.g. COPA I 1/400 HIE) and with ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps (e.g. COPA I 1/400 HSE). The higher operating current then leads to higher luminous flux levels for the same lamps together with a slightly altered light quality. In both cases suitable starters are required. 2. Glass covers In general, metal halide lamps require a glass cover to protect people and property in the event of the lamp exploding. It is the manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s responsibility to decide whether to permit individual lamp types to be used in uncovered luminaires. Suitable safety devices are installed in the lamps for this purpose (e.g. integral safety tube, outer protective coating). The detailed information from the manufacturer must be observed without fail. 3. Service life characteristics The average lamp service life (lamp survival factor) and the reduction in luminous flux (lamp luminous flux maintenance factor) can vary markedly in some of the different lamp types. They also depend on the switching frequency and the position of use. Once again the detailed data from the manufacturer must be taken into account. The maintenance factor tables in Chapter 8 contain some typical values.
18 / Chapter 4
The Lighting Handbook
With these high-pressure discharge lamps in particular, it is important to replace the lamps at the designated end of their service life (maintenance interval) at the latest. Continued use may lead to damage of lamps and control gear and consequently of luminaires!
Tube E 40 any no
250 W/D
HQI-T
Ellipsoid E 40 any no
Tube E 40 any no
Tube mini G 22 any no
20,000 h
Ellipsoid E40 pendant ±15° yes
20,000 h
Tube E 40 pendant ±20° no
24,500 lm 3,000 K 90
All data subject to change. For reliable information and data on other lamp types, please refer to the manufacturer’s data.
25,800 lm 3,000 K 89
25,500 lm 25,500 lm 25,000 lm 4,000 K/5,400 K 4,000 K/5,400 K 4,000 K 70 70 65
not permitted not permitted 18,000 lm 18,000 lm 20,500 lm 4,500 K/6,700 K 4,500 K/6,700 K 4,500 K 70 70 65
20,000 h
Ellipsoid E 40 pendant ±15° no
PHILIPS HCI-E HCI-T HCI-TM HPI-PLUS HPI-Plus HPI-T PLUS POWERBALL POWERBALL POWERBALL 745/767 BU 745/767 BU-P 645 250 W/WDL 250 W/WDL 250 W/WDL 250 W 250 W 250 W
12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 6,000 h See maintenance factors in Chapter 8 “Calculation of economic efficiency”
Ellipsoid E 40 any yes
250 W/D
250 W/D
Ellipsoid E 40 any no
HQI-E/P
OSRAM HQI-E
Operation with metal-halide lamp ballast (HI) Luminous flux not permitted not permitted not permitted not permitted Colour temperature Colour rendition index Ra Operation with high-pressure sodium-vapour lamp ballast (HS) Luminous flux 19,000 lm 17,000 lm 20,000 lm 24,100 lm Colour temperature 5,200 K 5,200 K 5,300 K 3,000 K Colour rendition 90 90 90 88 index Ra
Design Base Burning position Approved for operation in uncovered luminaires Average service life Reduction in lumin, flux
The Lighting Handbook
Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 W
Chapter 4 / 19
Ellipsoid E40 any yes
Ellipsoid E40 any no
Tube E40 any no
Tube E40 horizontal ±45° no
Ellipsoid E40 pendant ±15° no
32,500 lm 30,000 lm 4,500 K/6,700 K 4,300 K 70 70 42,500 lm 35,000 lm 4,000 K/5,400 K 3,800 K 70 70
39,000 lm 3,800 K >65
20,000 h
Ellipsoid E40 horizontal ±20° no
HPI PLUS 400 W 743 HOR
33,000 lm 4,100 K >60
12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 20,000 h See maintenance factors in Chapter 8 “Calculation of economic efficiency”
Ellipsoid E40 any no
HPI PLUS 400 W 745/767 BU
HQI-E HQI-E/P HQI-E HQI-BT HQI-T 400 W/D 400 W/D 400 W/N 400 W/D 400 W/N (clear)
All data subject to change. For reliable information and data on other lamp types, please refer to the manufacturer’s data.
The Lighting Handbook
20 / Chapter 4
Operation with metal-halide lamp ballast (HI) Luminous flux 26,000 lm 25,000 lm 33,000 lm 27,000 lm Colour temperature 5,800 K 5,000 K 4,700 K 6,100 K Colour rendition index Ra 90 90 58 90 Operation with high-pressure sodium-vapour lamp ballast (HS) Luminous flux 30,000 lm 31,000 lm 40,000 lm 35,000 lm Colour temperature 5,900 K 4,500 K 4,100 K 5,200 K Colour rendition index Ra 90 90 64 90
Design Base Burning position Approved for operation in uncovered luminaires Average service life Reduction in luminous flux
PHILIPS
OSRAM
20,000 h
Tube E40 horizontal ±20° no
HPI-T PLUS 400 W 645
42,500 lm 42,500 lm 4,000 K/5,400 K 4,000 K 70 65
32,500 lm 35,000 lm 4,500 K/6,700 K 4,500 K 70 65
20,000 h
Ellipsoid E40 pendant ±15° yes
HPI PLUS 400 W 745/767 BU-P
Characteristics of metal halide lamps 400 W
Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm circular (partly amalgam techn.) Fluorescent lamp Ø 26 mm light colour 830
Fluorescent lamp Ø 26 mm long service life
Compact fluorescent lamp (3 double tubes) with integral electr. ballast E27" screw-in cap Compact fluorescent lamp (1 short double tube) only for conventional/low-loss ballast Compact fluorescent lamp (2 double tubes) G24q 4-pin cap for conv./low-loss/electr. ballasts Compact fluorescent lamp (3 double tubes) amalgam techn. GX24q 4-pin cap Compact fluorescent lamp (1 long double tube) 2G11 4-pin cap Compact fluorescent lamp (1 long double tube) 42G11 4-pin cap amalgam techn.
T26 /830
T26-LL
TC-TSE
TC-LI
TC-L
TC-TELI
TC-DEL
TC-S
40–80 W
18–80 W
13–70 W
10–26 W
5–11 W
5–30 W
15–58 W
15–58 W
22–60 W
14–80 W
T16-R(I)
T16-bu
24–120 W
Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm amalgam techn. light colour 830 Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm blau
T16-I /830
MASTER TL5 HE/HO Super 80/840 MASTER TL5 HO/VHO TOP /830 TL5 HO Coloured Pro MASTER TL5C
Philips
DULUX L CONSTANT
DULUX L
DULUX T/E IN
DULUX D/E
---
MASTER PL-T TOP 4 Pin MASTER PL-L 4 Pin
MASTER PL-C 4 Pin
MASTER TL-D Super 80 /830 --MASTER TL-D Xtra/Xtreme DULUX EL E27 MASTER PL Electronic DULUX S MASTER PL-S 2 Pin
L /830
FH /840 HE; FQ /840 HO FQ /830 HO CONSTANT FH /67 HE; FQ /67 HO FC
System power Osram 14–80 W
Description
Fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps T16 /840 Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm light colour 840
LBS code
The Lighting Handbook
---
Biax L - 4 pin
Biax T/E - 4 Pin
Biax D/E - 4 Pin
Biax S - 2 pin
Electronic Biax
T8 Polylux XLR F /830 ---
---
---
Starcoat T5 F/T5/840 ---
GE
---
Lynx-LE
Lynx-TE
Lynx-DE
Lynx-S
Mini-Lynx T /E27
T8 Luxline Plus F /830 ---
---
---
T5 Luxline Plus FHE/840, FHO/840 ---
Sylvania
Lamp descriptions acc. to LBS (ZVEI) – a comparison of models and manufacturers’ descriptions
Chapter 4 / 21
Description
22 / Chapter 4
The Lighting Handbook
MASTER QL ---
Philips
Capsuleline Pro STARLITE Brilliantline Pro Dichroic
HALOSTAR DECOSTAR
HALOSPOT 111 FL Aluline Pro 111 24D
HALOLINE
HalogenA Pro E27 AM Plusline Pro
HALOLUX CERAM
Standard A55 CL Reflector NR80 PAR38 PAR38 HALOPAR 16 GU10 Twistline Pro Alu
CLASSIC A CL CONCENTRA R80 CONCENTRA
--ENDURA
System power Osram
Induction lamps LMG-IHf Ball-shaped induction lamp 55–165 W LMG-SIHf Double-tube induction lamp 70–150 W Incandescent and halogen incandescent lamps A60 /c Incandescent GLS lamp Ø 60 mm transp. 15–100 W R80 Incandescent reflector lamp Ø 80 mm 40–100 W PAR38 Parabolic incandescent reflector lamp 60–120 W Ø 38/8" = approx. 122 mm QPAR51 /GU10 Halogen incandescent lamp for mains 35–50 W voltage, with parabolic aluminium reflector Ø 51 mm GU10 cap QT32 /m Halogen incandescent lamp for mains volt., 60–250 W tube-shaped Ø 32 mm frosted outside Halogen incandescent lamp for mains 60–2000 W QT-DE12 voltage, cap at both sides Ø 12 mm QT12-ax-LP LV halogen incandescent lamp Ø approx. 20–100 W 12 mm axial filament low-pressure system Low-pressure 12 V QR-CBC51 LV halogen incandescent lamp with 20–65 W cold-light specular reflector Ø 51 mm and glass cover QR111 /24° LV halogen incandescent lamp with 35–100 W reflector Ø 111 mm Radiation angle 24°
LBS code
Halogen Axial
AR111 12V FL
---
Precise MR16 /CG SUPERIA 50
Q T3/12V GY6.35 GY6,35
halogen rod
DLX-T Tube satin
HI-SPOT ES 50
Q MR16 --Tubular FR K /Q T3/CL
Normal E27 transp. Refl. R80 PAR38
-----
Sylvania
A1/CL/E27 R80/E27 PAR38/E27
-----
GE
Lamp descriptions acc. to LBS (ZVEI) – a comparison of models and manufacturers’ descriptions
MASTER Colour CDM-Tm, CDM-TC, CDM-Elite-TC MASTER Colour CDM-TD MASTER HPI Plus BU-P MASTER SDW-TG
HCI-TF PB, HCI-TC PB HCI-TS
---
HIT-DE-CE
---
ConstantColor CMH /TD/UVC ---
SuperMini CMH/T, CMH/TC
ConstantColor CMH /T/UVC
Arcstream ARC/T
Kolorlux Standard
GE
---
Britelux HSI-SX/P
CMI-TD UVS
CMI-TC
CMI-T UVS
HSI-T
HSL-BW
Sylvania
SOX
MASTER SOX
---
SLP
NAV-T SUPER MASTER SON-T Pro Lucalox LU /HO/T/40 SHP-TS
HQI-E/P
MASTER Colour CDM-T
HCI-T
Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, cap at 70–250 W both sides, with ceramic discharge tube HIE-P Metal halide lamp, ellipsoidal, with quartz 70–400 W discharge tube and anti-burst tube for open luminaires HST-CRI GX12 High-pressure sodium-vapour lamp, 50–100 W tube-shaped, colour-improved, GX12 cap HST-MF High-pressure sodium-vapour lamp, 50–1000 W tube-shaped, increased luminous flux Low-pressure discharge lamps LST Low-pressure sodium-vapour lamp, 18–180 W tube-shaped
---
HQI-T
Philips HPL-N
System power Osram HQL
Description
High-pressure discharge lamps HME High-pressure mercury-vapour lamp 50–1000 W ellipsoidal HIT Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, with 35–150 W quartz discharge tube HIT-CE UVr Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, with 35–250 W ceramic discharge tube, reduced UV radiation HIT-TC-CE Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, with 20–70 W ceramic discharge tube, compact design
LBS code
The Lighting Handbook
Lamp descriptions acc. to LBS (ZVEI) – a comparison of models and manufacturers’ descriptions
Chapter 4 / 23
The Lighting Handbook
24 / Chapter 4
ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw
≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80
G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 GX5 GX5 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 G13 G13 G13
Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature 1,200 1,900 1,750 2,600 3,300 3,100 4,300 4,450 6,150 1,950 3,400 4,750 4,850 6,800 7,300 9,200 1,800 3,200 4,000 5,000 1,350 3,350 5,200
Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C)
* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure)
Fluorescent lamps T 16 14 W T 16 21 W T 16 24 W T 16 28 W T 16 35 W T 16 39 W T 16 49 W T 16 54 W T 16 80 W T16-I 24 W T16-I 39 W T16-I 49 W T16-I 54 W T16-I 80 W T16-I 95 W T16-I 120 W T 16-R 22 W T 16-R 40 W T 16-R 55 W T 16-R 60 W T 26 18 W T 26 36 W T 26 58 W
Lamp name
25 42 66
13,000 13,000 13,000
20–24,000 84 20–24,000 87 20–24,000 74 20–24,000 93 20–24,000 93 20–24,000 76 20–24,000 90 20–24,000 81 20–24,000 82 24,000 72 24,000 74 24,000 88 24,000 80 24,000 approx. 77 24,000 approx. 70 24,000 approx. 71 12,000 69 12,000 71 12,000 67 12,000 76 16–20,000 68 16–20,000 89 16–20,000 93
Max. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h
e l e ct r on i c b al l as t
System power in W
16–18 24 27 31–33 39–41 46 54 61 approx. 88 27 46 54 61 approx. 88 approx. 105 approx. 130 26 45–47 60 66 19–20 36 54–57
System Lamp power service life* in W in h
ma g n e t i c l ow- l o s s b.
Characteristic values of the major lamps
G24d-1/q-1 G24d-1/q-1 G24d-2/q-2 G24d-3/q-3 GX24d-1/q-1 GX24d-2/q-2 GX24d-3/q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-4 GX24q-5 2G8 GX24q-6 2G8 2G8 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11
600 900 1,200 1,800 900 1,200 1,800 2,400 3,200 4,300 4,000 5,200 6,000 9,000 1,200 1,800 2,900 3,500 4,800 6,000 3,500 4,800 6,000
Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C)
* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure)
≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80
Colour Colour rendition Base temperature index Ra
Compact fluorescent lamps TC-D/-DEL 10 W ww, nw TC-D/-DEL 13 W ww, nw TC-D/-DEL 18 W ww, nw TC-D/-DEL 26 W ww, nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 13 W ww, nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 18 W ww, nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 26 W ww, nw TC-TEL(I) 32 W ww, nw TC-TEL(I) 42 W ww, nw TC-TEL(I) 57 W ww, nw TC-TELI 60 W ww, nw TC-TELI 70 W ww, nw TC-TELI 85 W ww, nw TC-TELI/-QELI 120 W ww, nw TC-L 18 W ww, nw TC-L 24 W ww, nw TC-L 36 W ww, nw TC-L 40 W ww, nw TC-L 55 W ww, nw TC-L 80 W ww, nw TC-LI 40 W ww, nw TC-LI 55 W ww, nw TC-LI 80 W ww, nw
Lamp name
The Lighting Handbook
8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000
8,000 8,000 8,000
15 17 23 31 17 23 31
25 30 42
System Lamp power service life* in W in h
ma g n e t i c l ow- l o s s b.
12 14 18–20 28 14 18–20 28 35–36 46–47 62 65 75 92 128 19 25–27 34–39 45 55–61 85 45 55–61 85
10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 20,000 10,000 20,000 20,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
50 64 66 64 64 66 64 68 69 69 62 70 65 70 63 72 85 77 87 71 78 87 71
Lamp Max. system luservice life* minous efficiency in h in lm/W
e l e ct r on i c b al l as t
System power in W
Characteristic values of the major lamps
Chapter 4 / 25
Special Special Special GY6,35 GY6,35 GU5,3 GU5,3 G53 G53 R7s R7s R7s E27 E27 E27
≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90
≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90
2,200 5,000 9,500 1,430 2,400 4,000
600 930 **700–14,000 **850–15,000 **1,700–30,000 **2,800–48,000
3,550–3,650 6,100–6,300 12,000
Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C)
* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure)
The Lighting Handbook
26 / Chapter 4
≥80 ≥80 ≥80
Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature
Induction lamps LMG-IHf 55 W (QL 55 W) ww, nw LMG-IHf 85 W (QL 85 W) ww, nw LMG-IHf 165 W (QL 165 W) ww, nw Low-voltage halogen lamps QT 12 35 W ww QT 12 50 W ww QR-CBC 51 35 W (8–60°) ww QR-CBC 51 50 W (8–60°) ww QR 111 75 W (8–45°) ww QR 111 100 W (8–45°) ww High-voltage halogen lamps QT-DE 12 150 W L 114,2 ww QT-DE 12 300 W ww QT-DE 12 500 W ww QT 32 100 W matt ww QT 32 150 W matt ww QT 32 250 W matt ww
Lamp name
** Axial luminous intensity in cd.
1,500 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 3,000 3,000
System Lamp power service life* in W in h
ma g n e t i c l ow-l o s s b.
55 85 165
60,000 60,000 60,000
14 16 19 14 16 16
16 18 16 18 10 10
64 71 73
Max. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h
e l e ct r on i c b al l as t
System power in W
Characteristic values of the major lamps
System Lamp power service life* in W in h
ma g n e t i c l ow-l o s s b.
≥80, ≥70 E27 4,900–5,000 82–96 6,000 ≥80, ≥70 E27 7,300–8,100 112–115 6,000 ≥80, ≥70 E27 10,500–12,500 168–177 6,000 ≥90, ≥70, ≥60 E40 17,000–25,500 275–285 6,000 ≥90, ≥70, ≥60 E40 20,500–43,000 400–460 6,000 ≥60 E40 95,000 1,050–1,065 6,000 ≥90, ≥80 E27 5,000–6,000 85 9–12,000 ≥80 E27 8,000–8,500 120 12,000 ≥90, ≥80 E27 12,000–13,500 170 9–12,000 ≥80 E40 24,500 270 12,000 ≥80 G12 5,200–5,500 82–96 6,000 ≥80 G12 13,000 168–177 6,000 ≥90, ≥70, ≥60 E40 19,000–21,000 275–285 6,000 ≥80 PGJ5/G8,5/GU6,5 1,615–1,700 ≥90, ≥80 PGJ5/G8,5 3,000–3,500 44–46 9,000 ≥90, ≥80 G8,5 6,300–7,300 82–96 9,000 ≥90, ≥80 G12 3,100–3,500 44–46 9,000 ≥90, ≥80 G12 6,400–7,300 82–96 9,000 ≥80 G12 14,000 168–177 6,000 ≥90, ≥80 E40/G22/G12 23,000–25,800 272 6–12,000
Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C)
* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure)
ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw, tw nw, tw nw ww, nw ww ww, nw ww ww, nw ww, nw nw, tw ww ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw
Colour Colour rendition Base temperature index Ra
Metal halide lamps HIE 70 W HIE 100 W HIE 150 W HIE 250 W HIE 400 W HIE 1,000 W HIE-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 100 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 150 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 250 W (Ceramic) HIT 70 W HIT 150 W HIT 250 W HIT-TC-CE 20 W (Ceramic) HIT-TC-CE 35 W (Ceramic) HIT-TC-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 35 W (Ceramic)) HIT-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 150 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 250 W (Ceramic)
Lamp name
The Lighting Handbook
6,000 6,000
9–12,000 9–12,000 6,000 6,000 7,500–9,000 9–12,000 9–12,000 9–12,000 9–12,000 6–12,000 6–12,000
80–83 172
72 ca, 160 80–83 172 ca, 24 42–45 80–83 42–45 80–83 172
63 72 74 93 93 90 83 71 84 91 69 77 76 71 83 91 83 83 83 96
Lamp Max. system luservice life* minous efficiency in h in lm/W
e l e ct r on i c b al l as t
System power in W
Characteristic values of the major lamps
Chapter 4 / 27
275–285 440–450 41–42 62 114–116 275 440–450
≥60, ≥20 E40 22,000–32,000 ≥60, ≥20 E40 36,000–54,000 ≥80 PG12-1 1,300 ≥80 PG12-1/GX12-1 2,300–2,400 ≥80 PG12-1/GX12-1 4,900–5,000 ≥60, ≥20 E40 23,000–33,000 ≥60, ≥20 E40 37,000–56,500
82–96 168–177 275–285 40–46 89–95 168–177 275 266–270 425
E40 E40
≥40 ≥40
5,000–6,000 11,250 20,000 3,200–3,400 5,700–7,000 13,500–14,200 24,500
10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
8,000 8,000
6,000 6,000 6,000 10,000 7,000 12,000 12,000
System Lamp power service life* in W in h
ma g n e t i c l ow- l o s s b.
13,000 22,000
RX7s RX7s Fc2 RX7s RX7s RX7s Fc2
Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C)
* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) For an extensive table of lamp data, please refer to the Technical Appendix of the ZUMTOBEL product catalogue. All data without engagement. In case of doubt, please contact the lamp manufacturer.
The Lighting Handbook
28 / Chapter 4
≥90, ≥80 ≥90, ≥80, ≥70 ≥90, ≥80, ≥70 ≥80 ≥90, ≥80 ≥90, ≥80 ≥80
Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature
Metal halide lamps HIT-DE 70 W ww, nw HIT-DE 150 W ww, nw, tw HIT-DE 250 W ww, nw, tw HIT-DE-CE 35 W (Ceramic) ww HIT-DE-CE 70 W (Ceramic) ww, nw HIT-DE-CE 150 W (Ceramic) ww, nw HIT-DE-CE 250 W (Ceramic) ww High-pressure mercury vapour lamps HME 250 W ww, nw HME 400 W ww, nw High-pressure sodium vapour lamps HSE 250 W ww HSE 400 W ww HST-CRI 35 W (SDW-T) ww HST-CRI 50 W (SDW-T/-TG) ww HST-CRI 100 W (SDW-T/-TG) ww HST 250 W ww HST 400 W ww
Lamp name
10,000 10,000
10,000 7–15,000 12–15,000
42–45 80–83 172
62 112
6,000 6,000
80–83 172
112 120 31 39 42 116 123
48 51
75 75 72 85 79 80 89
Max. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h
e l e ct r on i c b al l as t
System power in W
Characteristic values of the major lamps
Energy efficiency of luminaires Most of the electrical power is consumed in the lamp and its control gear. In order to clarify the power consumption of the ballast/lamp system, the European Union has adopted the energy classification system (Directive 2000/55/EU on energy efficiency requirements for ballasts for fluorescent lamps). The EEI (Energy Efficiency Index) classifies ballasts into seven categories: Class
Ballasts
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C
Dimmable electronic ballasts Reduced-loss electronic ballasts Electronic ballasts Magnetic ballasts, very low loss (low-loss ballast) Magnetic ballasts, low loss (low-loss ballast) Magnetic ballasts, moderate loss (conventional ballast) Magnetic ballasts, very high loss (conventional ballast)
D
Since 21 May 2002, it has been prohibited to sell class D ballasts; class C ballasts have ceased to be produced since 21 November 2005 at the latest.
Example for T26 36 W 840:
The Lighting Handbook
EEI A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C D
≤ 19 W (25 % dimming is equivalent to 50 % A3) ≤ 36 ≤ 38 ≤ 41 ≤ 43 ≤ 45 ≤ 45 Chapter 4 / 29
For detailed information on ambient conditions and conditions of use, please refer to the product data sheets.
The Lighting Handbook
30 / Chapter 4
Special features
• •
Switchable at zero power Dimmability subsequently enabled Dimmability DALI-addressable Configurable Error and status feedback Dimming automatically blocked in DC mode Emergency lighting level adjustable for DC mode Emergency lighting-compatible DC mode Critical operating conditions DALI-switchable Dimming function can be enabled subsequently via Litenet
• • • • • •
DOD
ZUMTOBEL names
• • • •
• • • • • • • Addressability: Addressability: individual individual dimming dimming Flexible grouping Flexible grouping without rewiring without rewiring Luminaire status Luminaire status feedback feedback DSI control also possible
•
•
DALI only
•
DALI
Luminaires can be dimmed collectively No readdressing required when replacing control gear
•
•
•
•
DSI
Luminaires can be dimmed collectively Can be used with some reservations in emergency lighting installations
•
•
1–10 V
Long service life up to 1,000,000 h Ambient temperatures up to 70°C Integral over-/ undervoltage identification
• •
Long lamp service life High-quality light thanks to high-frequency operation More application options owing to DC operation Faulty lamps automatically switched off and switched on again after lamp replacement
•
Heavy-duty e.b. Electr. ballast
Overview of electronic ballasts
Energy saving at normal operation Set-AC
P C A 69 W
Power consumption as a
55–8 W
function of dimmer setting
Power consumption –20 % to –88 %
compared with conventional ballasts 20 % to 88 % at 1 % dimming level (off)
55 W 45 W 35 W 25 W
8W
8W
8W
100 % 75 % 50 % 25 % Conventional ballast Controlled by LUXMATE Dimmer setting
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
13:00
14:00
15:00
Power requirement of a traditional freestanding luminaire
1%
16:00
Potential energy savings using daylight sensors and presence detectors up to 70 % compared with constant light e.g. freestanding luminaire using SensControl
▼ ▼
▼
▼
increasing daylight
▼
cloud cover
sufficient daylight
▼
▼
absent ▼
absent
▼
▼
▼
▼
Power requirement of a freestanding luminaire using SensControl
decreasing daylight
Light required in terms of ergonomics using SensControl
Set-DC 100
Emergency lighting extra function in Tridonic PCA
in (%)
potential energy saving of 52 %
Thanks to a reducible DC dimming level (Set-DC), the emergency lighting installation can be designed for reduced operation. At a luminous flux of 10 %, savings of up to 70 % are possible at DC operation.
35
22
90 80 70 60 50
AC-mode DC-mode
The Lighting Handbook
40 30 20 further potential saving of 27 % 10 0 59
53
48
43
39
30
28
17
12
Power (W) 10 at 230 V DC
Chapter 4 / 31
Overview of LED control gear Cable length vs. active power for 24 V DC supply Cable lengths are limited exclusively on the assumption that a maximum voltage drop of 0.7 V is permissible. Cable cross-section/length: Output
Current
Voltage
0.75 mm2 1 mm2
1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2
10 W 15 W
0.417 A 0.625 A
24 V 24 V
35.0 m 23.5 m
47.0 m 31.0 m
70.5 m 47.0 m
117.5 m 78.5 m
20 W 30 W 40 W
0.833 A 1.250 A 1.667 A
24 V 24 V 24 V
17.5 m 11.5 m 8.5 m
23.5 m 15.5 m 11.5 m
35.0 m 23.5 m 17.5 m
60.0 m 39.0 m 29.5 m
50 W 60 W 70 W 80 W 90 W 100 W 110 W
2.083 A 2.500 A 2.917 A 3.333 A 3.750 A 4.167 A 4.583 A
24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V
7.0 m 5.5 m 5.0 m 4.0 m 3.5 m 3.5 m 3.0 m
9.0 m 7.5 m 6.5 m 5.5 m 5.0 m 4.5 m 4.0 m
14.0 m 11.5 m 10.0 m 8.5 m 7.5 m 7.0 m 6.0 m
23.5 m 19.5 m 16.5 m 14.5 m 13.0 m 11.5 m 10.5 m
Please note: maximum voltage drop permissible = 0.7 V
A: control unit to LED C004 amplifier The cable between control unit and amplifier (LED C004) may be up to 20 m long. Make sure that the minimum input voltage of the amplifier’s control input is at least 12 V. B: LED C004 amplifier to first LED luminaire
32 / Chapter 4
C: control unit to LED luminaire/luminaire group In order to avoid interferences with electromagnetic compatibility, the use of shielded cables for the lead between control unit and LED luminaires is recommended for cables longer than 0.5 m. Even if cables are shielded, cables longer than 15 m may lead to electromagnetic compatibility interferences in highly sensitive areas.
The Lighting Handbook
RGB and dimming of LED luminaires For “dimming applications”, owing to partly high outputs and accordingly possible interferences with electromagnetic compatibility, other points must be taken into account:
D: mains unit to LED luminaire/luminaire group The maximum cable length between mains unit and last
LED luminaire is specified in the table. Control gear should possibly be placed next to the luminaires.
A C + Ch 1-3 Control unit e.g. C002, K211 – Ch 1 – Ch 2 – Ch 3
B + –
Mains unit 12/24 V e.g. K240
+ Uin + Ch 1-3 – Uin Amplifier + Ch 1-3 e.g. LED C004 – Ch 1 – Ch 1 – Ch 2 – Ch 2 – Ch 3 – Ch 3
LED luminaire
D
The Lighting Handbook
Cable length for supplying current-controlled LEDs, switchable Cable lengths are limited exclusively on the assumption that a maximum voltage drop of 0.7 V is permissible. In each case, they relate to the last luminaire in a group. It is assumed that the control gear operates at max. capacity – for details, please refer to the control gear’s technical description. A minimum voltage of 4.5 V is assumed for each LED.
Current for LED lum. 350 mA 700 mA
Please note: use copper cables. Cables must not be laid in parallel to mains/highvoltage conductors. Cable length for supplying current-controlled LEDs, dimmable PWM The max. cable length to a group’s last luminaire may be 13 m. The cable cross-section has to be > 0.25 mm2. For cables longer than 1.5 m, shielded cables have to be used.
Cable cross-section/length 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 30.0 m 40.0 m 60.0 m 100.0 m 15.0 m 20.0 m 30.0 m 50.0 m
Chapter 4 / 33
* These luminaires must be additionally supplied with 24 V DC supply voltage!
Monochrome LED luminaires, voltage controlled 24 V
The Lighting Handbook
34 / Chapter 4
LED-mains unit
24 V-DC
24 V-DC
LED-mains unit Max. 3 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear or max. 3 x control voltage 0â&#x20AC;&#x201C;10 V
Mains
DALI/DSI/switchDIM Mains
Mains
Mains
C001
K210
24 V-DC PWM
LED-mains unit
24 V-DC
24 V-DC PWM
SYSTEMLED Flood*
SYSTEMLED Flood*
SYSTEMLED Flood
LEDOS 24 V
LEDOS 24 V
LEDOS 24 V
SYSTEMLED Deco
SYSTEMLED Deco
SYSTEMLED Deco
KAVA LED 24 V
KAVA LED 24 V
KAVA LED 24 V
MICROS LED 24 V
On/Off Dimming
Application C004 PWM amplifier for controlling LED objects with higher output
* These luminaires must be additionally supplied with 24 V DC supply voltage!
24 V RGB LED luminaires in dynamic colours
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 4 / 35
K211
24 V-DC
LED-mains unit
24 V-DC
24 V-DC
24 V-DC
C004
C002
C003
24 V-DC PWM
24 V-DC PWM
24 V-DC PWM
24 V-DC PWM
LEDOS 24 V mono/RGB
SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB
SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB
SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB
SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB
24 V-DC LED-mains unit
The C004 amplifier is used where the luminaire output is higher than the output power of the control unit used.
LED-mains unit PWM control signal (e.g. C001, C002, C003, K210, K211)
Mains
LED-mains unit 1 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear
Mains
DALI
Mains
C001
24 V-DC PWM
LED-mains unit 3 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear or 3 x control voltage 0–10 V
Mains
DALI Mains
Mains
SYSTEMLED Deco mono/RGB
SYSTEMLED Deco RGB
SYSTEMLED Deco RGB
SYSTEMLED Deco RGB
SYSTEMLED Deco RGB
KAVA LED mono/RGB
KAVA LED RGB
KAVA LED RGB
KAVA LED RGB
KAVA LED RGB
PHAOS lighting tile
PHAOS lighting tile
PHAOS lighting tile
PHAOS lighting tile
PHAOS lighting tile
Autom. colour sequence Colour sequence can be selected with DALI, 0–10 V with sequencer
The Lighting Handbook
350 mA RGB LED luminaires in dynamic colours, current-controlled
Monochrome 350 mA LED luminaires, currentcontrolled
24 V-DC
Dali
Mains K350 DALI RGB Constant-current converter
LED mains unit PWM control signal C350 PWM dimmer (e.g. C001, C002, C003, K211)
Mains
LED mains unit (constant current) dimmable via PWM
350 mA
LED mains unit (constant current)
PWM control signal (e.g. C001, K210)
Mains
Mains
350 mA PWM
350 mA PWM
350 mA PWM
LEDOS B RGB 350 mA
LEDOS B RGB 350 mA
LEDOS B 350 mA
LEDOS B 350 mA
PASO II RGB 350 mA
PASO II RGB 350 mA
ORILED 350 mA
ORILED 350 mA
PANOS S 100 LED 350 mA
PANOS S 100 LED 350 mA
On/Off Dimming Automatic colour sequence with sequencer, DALI 0â&#x20AC;&#x201C;10 V
36 / Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Lighting and room management LUXMATE lighting management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Easy dimming with BASIC and DIMLITE . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug & play with ZBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creative solutions with EMOTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building-wide with LITENET and PROFESSIONAL . . . . .
3 4 – 11 12 – 13 14 – 15 16 – 19
LUXMATE lighting management – The intelligent control system for individual rooms and throughout buildings Function
Applications
PROFESSIONAL
LUXMATE LITENET (based on TCP/IP and DALI) – Artificial light/daylight/blinds – Office building with high – Maximum flexibility owing to requirements in terms reconfiguration by software of flexibility, ergonomic com– Can be subsequently upgraded patibility and econ. efficiency with extra functions (on demand) – OPC and BACnet interfaces with other building services and BMS – Optimised for TASK AREA concepts according to EN 12464 – Integration of ONLITE emergency lighting system – Customised control concepts
LITENET
LUXMATE PROFESSIONAL (based on LUXMATE bus system) – Artificial light/daylight/blinds – Conference rooms – Interfaces to media technology – Office buildings – Integration of ONLITE – Shopping malls emergency lighting system – Museums – link to BMS and central – Industry maintenance
– Hotels – Private dwellings – Shops
LUXMATE BASIC/DIMLITE (based on DSI/DALI) – Daylight-based – In the home – Infrared remote control unit – Small offices & – Standard switch components surgeries – No addressing, group dimming – Commercial premises – Zero-power switching and dimming
BASIC
The Lighting Handbook
ZBOX – Lighting scenes – RGB colour control – Nightlogic – Webtool
ZBOX
EMOTION
LUXMATE EMOTION (based on DALI) – Presence-based/daylight-based control – Shops – Timer – Health & Care – Special luminaires: RGB, Tempura – Wellness – ACTIVE LIGHT lighting concepts – Control rooms – Flexibility of individual – Offices addressing/grouping – In the home
Chapter 5 / 3
The Lighting Handbook
4 / Chapter 5
Function Dimming, 1 channel Dimming, 1 channel, with 1 light-level memory Daylight-based dimming, 2 channels 2 or 4-channel multifunction
DALI DSI DALI-T DSI-T* DALI-TD DSI-TD* DALI-TLC DSI-TLC DIMLITE 4ch** (4-channel) DIMLITE 2CH** (2-channel)
All control gear with DALI/DSI control input Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA electronic dimmable transformer: 105 VA + 150 VA electronic dimmable ballast electronic dimmable LED converter 1 ch./3 ch. PCI-FOX electronic ballast
Control Module name: momentary-action switch, presence detector momentary-action switch momentary-action switch, light sensor momentary-action switch Circle, light sensor, presence detector, IR remote control unit
Dimming range 0–100 % 0–100 % 0–100 % 0–100 % 1–100 % 0–100 % cannot be dimmed
Lamp control gear (electronic ballast, transformer, ...)
All modules available for installation in luminaire or recess into ceiling * also available as housing for installation in switch cabinet ** only available as housing for installation in switch cabinet
Two steps to create your lighting solution
2. select control funtion required
Lamps GLS lamps PAR lamps HV halogen incandescent lamps LV halogen incandescent lamps Fluorescent lamps LED High-pressure discharge lamps
1. select appropriate lamp control gear
LUXMATE control unit
Dimming with LUXMATE BASIC/DIMLITE
Alternative: Connect terminals “T ” and “T ” together with a jumper if a single momentary-action switch is used.
– –
– –
APD
* available on request
D1 D2
TE
DSI transformer, max. 25 DALI transformer, max. 25*
or
D1 D2
DSI phase dimmer, max. 25 DALI phase dimmer, max. 25*
or
LV halogen incandescent lamps max. 105/150 VA
max. 2 m
Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps max. 300 VA
L' N N L
10 9
12 11
Lamps
DSI electronic ballast, max. 25 DALI electronic ballast, max. 25* Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL L N D1 PCA D2
Lamp control gear
Dimming range: 1 to 100 % light Lamps can be started at any dimming level Suitable for all major lamp types Easy to install Insensitive to mains fluctuations and interference Components can be delivered separately or pre-fitted in the luminaire Dimming-level memory
Programming instructions for preset light level (Dia): • Set brightness level required using momentary-action switch • Press the Preset/Dia switch for at least 5 seconds
DALI-TD
Momentary-action switch control L module with input for preset light level N D1 T T D2 DSI-TD Preset/Dia
Control line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm2, max. length 100 m
Control Units
– – Absolutely flicker-free dimming – Simple to operate using conventional momentary-action light switches – throughout – Hence ensures standardised design of light switches and sockets – Any number of momentary-action light switches can be connected in parallel –
phase dimmed phase neutral protective earth momentary-action switch input control line earth AC voltage
Conventional momentaryaction light switch Preset/Dia
Arguments for your customers
D
L L’ N PE T
User control units
230/240 V 50/60 Hz
Conventional double momentary-action light switch On/Off Dimming
L N PE
The Lighting Handbook
LUXMATE BASIC DSI-TD or DALI-TD
Dimming using conventional momentary-action light switches and with dimming-level memory
Chapter 5 / 5
Daylight-based control with DIMLITE and DALI/DSI-TLC Applications – Single and team offices – Areas near windows in shopping centres – Classrooms – Industrial bays – Gym halls – Warehouses
0%
50 %
500 lx artificial light daylight
Arguments for your customers
6 / Chapter 5
The Lighting Handbook
– Dims the lighting from 100–1 %, based exactly on the daylight available – Accurate window-light sensor rather than error-prone roomlight sensor – Energy savings of up to 75 % – Brightness level can be changed at any time using momentary-action dimmer switches – Economically priced – short pay-back period – Long lamp service life – Option to connect presence detector
ED-EYE/LSD sensor positioning
°
°
The Lighting Handbook
°
Installed in luminaire
Switch cabinet
2 groups
DALI-TLC/DSI-TLC
DIMLITE 2ch
4 groups
–
DIMLITE 4ch
Chapter 5 / 7
DIMLITE Multifunctional lighting control Arguments for your customers – Compact lighting control unit for 2/4 luminaire groups – DALI and DSI outputs – automatic identification – Reducing stand-by loss: automatic power disconnection of lighting actuators via integrated relay – Up to 3 lighting scenes, one of them with daylight-based control (depending on additional devices) – Modular range of functions, to be individually combined: − daylight-based control − lighting scene module − presence detectors/movement sensors − group module − infrared remote control unit − Circle comfort control unit − AUTO setup: automatic initialisation, no addressing required
− DIMLITE 2ch two-channel unit and DIMLITE 4ch four-channel unit are identical except for the number of output channels and corresponding key inputs. − Maximum cable length for all control lines (Control-IN, DSI and DALI): max. 300 m each at 1.5 mm². − The DIMLITE outputs are DSI or DALI broadcast – no addressing is required during commissioning. Groups are assigned by wiring the lighting actuators accordingly. − Maximum of 25 DALI units (25 DALI loads) or 50 DSI units per output channel. − Only Zumtobel ED units may be connected to Control-IN. Maximum of 8 ED units at Control IN (exception: max. 1 light sensor). − Up to 3 lighting scenes, depending on the control unit used; each control unit will always call up the same scene 1, 2, 3 or OFF. − The functions of the “ED-SDED2” ED unit may be selected using the integrated rotary switch: either scene module (1, 2, 3, OFF) or group module (dimming of Group 1, 2, 3, 4). − Conventional 230 V momentary-action switches can be connected to the momentary-action switch inputs. − PIR input to connect a conventional movement sensor. − Relay for mains cut-off: 16 A resistive load; in case of higher loads or capacitive/inductive loads, an external power contactor is recommended.
8 / Chapter 5
The Lighting Handbook
Design notes
ED-IR infrared receiver
Relay
All groups
Group 1
max. 300 m at 1.5 mm² max. 25 DALI or 50 DSI per channel
Load contactor (optional)
Group 2 Group 3
Group 4
Lamp control gear
PCA
PCA
T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps
T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps
T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps
T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps
Lamps
L N DA DA
TE one4all (1 DALI load)
e.g.: incandescent lamps
EMOTION-1RUK (10 DALI loads) e.g.: incandescent lamps DA K DA K’
L N DA DA
DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load)
DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) L N DA PCA DA
L N DA DA
DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load)
PCA
DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load)
L N DA DA
Control units
Channels 3 + 4 only with DIMLITE 4 ch
ED-SDED2 ED-SDED2 Circle Cxx group lighting control point module scene module comf. contr. unit
User control units
optional mains isolation facility
Lighting scene/ autom. daylight-based control
Presence detector
Control IN
max. 300 m at 1.5 mm² max. 8 ED units
L 230 V AC N PE ED-Eye ED-Sens IRlight sensor (PD+IR) TOUCH Multi-sensor
The Lighting Handbook
DIMLITE
Multifunctional lighting control
Chapter 5 / 9
L N PE T PD Se D
On/Off Dimming
G I G II
phase neutral protective earth momentary-action switch input presence detector input light sensor input control line earth AC voltage
Motion sensor/ Presence detector
The Lighting Handbook
10 / Chapter 5
Conventional double momentary-action light switch
LSD light sensor
Control units
L T1 T3 PD
Control line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm 2 max. length 100 m
DALI-TLC
Daylight-based control unit installed in luminaire/recessed into ceiling N Se2Se1 T2 D2 D1 T4 D2 D1 DSI-TLC in
Light-sensor line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm2, max. length 100 m
User control units
L 230/240 V 50/60 Hz N PE
Lamps
L N D1 D2
PCA
Group II
DSI electronic ballast, max. 25/group I, II DALI electronic ballast, max. 25/group I, II
or
10 9
Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL 12 11
Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 DSI electronic ballast, max. 25/group I, II TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL DALI electronic ballast, max. 25 /group I, II 12 L 11 N D1 10 PCA D2 9 Group I
Lamp control gear
LUXMATE BASIC Daylight DSI-TLC or DALI-TLC
Daylight-based control for small rooms
phase neutral protective earth DALI control line earth AC voltage
optionally several control points
DA DA
– – – –
DALI-CSS DALI-CSW
supply via DALI control line (3 DALI loads)
DA DA
Three lighting scenes can be called up using intuitive control unit Two luminaire groups can be individually dimmed Control of a max. of 64 DALI-controllable luminaires Luminaires addressed via control unit
Arguments for your customers
L N PE DA
User control units
L Mains 230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz N PE L N DALI bus power supply DA DA
The Lighting Handbook Lamps
max. 174 m max. 232 m max. 300 m
2 x 0.75 mm² 2 x 1.00 mm² 2 x 1.50 mm² >
– Several control units can be used in parallel – Easy installation – Personal lighting scenes can be stored
L DALI electronic ballast N PE PCA DA DA L DALI phase dimmer N PE DA APD DA L DALI transformer N PE DA TE DA * max. 64 DALI-compatible lamp control gear
max. 116 m
2 x 0.50 mm²
Ø
max. length of DALI line
Lamp control gear
LUXMATE BASIC Circle Kit
DALI-based lighting control system for individual rooms
Chapter 5 / 11
ZBOX plug&play system for hotel rooms, private dwellings and shops
FAQs What is the minimum load to be applied to the universal dimmer? 20 W How many luminaires may be connected to a ZBOX Controller? Max. of 300 W/channel or 10 DALI loads; total maximum output power per ZBOX: 16 A. Depending on the outputs of the luminaires used, a varying number of electronic ballasts may be used for an automatic circuit-breaker! What happens at the output side during a short circuit? The dimming module has been fitted with overload protection for lighting loads, extremely high inductive or capacitive loads may destroy the dimmer. The relay contact and the Controller have no overload protection; the electrician must ensure proper selectivity of the installation.
12 / Chapter 5
– direct connection via TCP-IP – transparency of costs – can be upgraded – 4 control points included – DALI Broadcast (no addressing of loads, except for RGB/W)
Does one always have to use a CIRCLE control unit? Via the SDED2 input module, conventional momentaryaction switches can be integrated. How can the ZBOX be upgraded? All LUXMATE bus units can be connected to the ZBOX Controller. It is also possible to network several Controllers. In this case, the plug&play function may not work. It makes sense to let an engineer do the commissioning. Can the ZBOX also be used for other applications? For other applications such as nursing homes, private dwellings or ordinary shops, the function and control concept can be adjusted via the ZBOX. WEBTOOL. The Lighting Handbook
Plug&Play – pre-addressed and preprogrammed – plug-in connectors – local stand-alone or networked system – web tool for fine-adjustment, no licence required
The Lighting Handbook
Group 7
Ceiling
Entrance area
Group 6
** Luminaire pre-addressed, 4 channels No phase dimmer
Group 8
Bathroom Mirror
optionally
Group 5
Group 9
Ceiling
Wellness**
Group 3
Group 4
Wall/table
Ceiling
Group 1
Right bed/reading
* Every luminaire optionally connected to phase dimmer, DALI and/or relay
Group 2
Left bed/reading
Blinds/ curtain
Window
ZBOX wiring scheme
Chapter 5 / 13
LUXMATE EMOTION Lighting control system Operation/supply L N PE
Mains 230/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
MomentaryDouble Presence momentary- action or action switch standard switch detector
EMOTION Touch/EMOTION Touch C L N
COM T 1 T 2 COM T 3
COM T 4
EKXP installation box (please order separately)
DA DA DA DA DALI 1 DALI 2
max. 0.25 m
DA DA
COM T 1 T 2 T 3 T 4
EMOTION-BVS2* EMOTION-EYE (2 DALI loads) DA DA
DA DA
EMOTION-SDED2 (2 DALI loads) DA DA
EMOTION-BV2*
DA DA Line 1: DALI control line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm 2 max. length 300 m max. 64 users (addresses) 99 DALI loads, actuators, inputs
Line 2: DALI control line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm 2 max. length 300 m max. 64 users (addresses) 99 DALI loads, actuators, inputs
EMOTION-SENS (4 DALI loads)
Cable lengths of DALI control line IR-TOUCH
Conductor cross-sections DALI control line
Cable length
2 2 2 2
116 174 232 300
x x x x
0.50 0.75 1.00 1.50
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2
m m m m
Switching lamps using LUXMATE EMOTION Lamp type
Safe installed load EMOTION-1RUK
EMOTION-4RUKS
A, PAR, QT T16/T26 with low-loss ballast (parallel p.f. corrected) TC with low-loss ballast (parallel p.f. corrected) T16/T26/TC with electr. ballast LV with transformer HIT, SDW-T, HS, HM
500 W 250 W
4 x 2,000 W 4 x 920 W
250 W
4 x 800 W
30A for 0.5 s max. 30A for 0.5 s max. â&#x20AC;&#x201C;
4 x 10A 4 x 10A 4 x 800 W
14 / Chapter 5
Lighting/emergency lighting L N
12 11
DA DA DALI electronic ballast one4all (1 DALI load)
10 9
L N DA DA EMOTION-4RUKS (1 DALI load)
K1 K 1' K2 K 2' K3 K 3' K4 K 4' K K'
DA DA
e.g. incandescent lamps
EMOTION-1RUK (10 DALI loads) EMOTION-CSX (3 DALI loads)
DA DA
L N DA DA
L N DA DA
L N DA DA
Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL
L' N Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps
EMOTION-APD (1 DALI load) max. 2 m TE one4all (1 DALI load)
LV halogen incandescent lamps
R G B DALI-LED converter (1 DALI load)
L N DA DA
L' N
LED luminaires
0/1–10 V units e.g. STARFLEX fibre optics (1 DALI load)
EMOTION-ANAS (1 DALI load) L N DA DA
DALI-2DSI (1 DALI load)
D1 D2 D1 D2
25 DSI luminaires 25 DSI luminaires
L N DA DA Locally supplied emergency luminaire LOCAL CHECK NT1 NT3 LDE DO (2 DALI loads) L N DA DA Escape-sign luminaire LOCAL CHECK (1 DALI load)
Chapter 5 / 15
LUXMATE LITENET for any size of building LITENET flexis N2 with server functions
PC with LITENET insite management software
Netlink
Ethernet (TCP/IP)
Netlink Daylight sensor
3 x 64 DALI
Bus
Luminaires Blinds
Control points
– LITENET flexisN2 without rotating parts (wear-free) – optional LITENET incontrol operating software
LITENET economy – up to 500 output addresses – no server required LITENET flexis N3 with server functions
PC with LITENET insite management software
Netlink
Ethernet (TCP/IP)
Netlink Daylight sensor
3 x 64 DALI
Bus
Luminaires Blinds
LITENET compact – up to 2,000 output addresses – no server required – LITENET flexis N3 in 19" rack
Control points
– fail-safe thanks to RAID1 – optional LITENET incontrol operating software – optional BACnet and OPC interfaces
PC with LITENET insite management software LITENET flexis N1
LITENET flexis N1
LITENET flexis N1
Netlink
Ethernet ( TCP/IP)
Netlink
Daylight sensor
3 x 64 DALI Luminaires
Standard L ITENET server Control points
LITENET flexible – LITENET server extremely – up to 10,000 output addresses fail-safe thanks to RAID1 – optional LITENET incontrol (or more upon request) operating software – can be cascaded as required – LITENET flexis N1 installed in – optional BACnet and OPC switch cabinet interfaces 16 / Chapter 5
The Lighting Handbook
Blinds
DALI – a must for modern office buildings Benefits of DALI installation: – Individual addressing: As each luminaire can be addressed individually, the highest flexibility requirements can be met and installation faults can be avoided. Luminaires are grouped and assigned to control units subsequently, via the easy to use LITENET-insite software. – Status feedback from each individual luminaire: Detailed knowledge about the installation’s state enable the operator to optimise operation and maintenance. Moreover, current alarms can be displayed by screen, printer, e-mail or text message. – Zero-power switching: Both installation effort and space required in the switch cabinet are reduced, as a switched phase is not required for each luminaire. ZUMTOBEL “Dimming on Demand” (DOD) makes DALI available at a special price Previously, users could only choose between switchable luminaires with electronic ballast or more expensive luminaires based on DALI. With a switchable DALI luminaire model, ZUMTOBEL is now offering a real innovation providing cost benefits at all stages of a project – from design through to actual operation of a building. Operation Purchase
Project stages
Implementation Project planning Planning Design
Modification costs with conventional luminaires Modification costs with DOD luminaires
The Lighting Handbook
Costs of modification
The models of this switchable luminaire originally supplied already boast all the above-mentioned benefits. And if dimming should be required at a later point in time – for instance for convenient control of scenes or economically efficient daylight-based control, the dimming function can be purchased at any time via a software upgrade, without any additional installation effort.
Chapter 5 / 17
LUXMATE PROFESSIONAL (selection) Commissioning/user control units LM-CG/ LM-PFC LM-EG Installation-speciďŹ c Single-room LM-MPO operation solution LM-CPA/CPO LM-XPO Single-/ Multi-room solution
IRED
LM-CS(X) control point
RS-232 link to AV system ASCI plain text protocol B1, B2
B 1 , B 2 , L, N B 1 , B 2 , L, N
LM-IRB
IRS B1, B2, L, N 24VDC 24VAC
LM-SI03
B1, B2 L, N 230 VAC
L, N
B1, B2
LM-SDED LM-RFR
LM-SWED
LUXMATE Bus For dimming and switching individual luminaire groups
Mains DSI- or DALI control line Sensor cable
EnOcean Function switch without battery
Room management/central control/automation Screen B1, B2
B1, B2
LM-RV Partition switch
Blinds Motor 1 K1
LM-2FSE L, N
Window
B1, B2 LM-ZSM
L, N Motor 2
LM-2JSM
L, N
B1, B2
B1, B2
Motor 1
B1, B2
LM-2LSE
L, N
L, N
Blinds Motor 2
Timer control
LM-iZSQ L, N Sequence automation
Window
B1, B2 LM-BVS35 L, N
18 / Chapter 5
Lighting management HIT/HST/HME lamps
LM-2RUK L, N
K', K
B1, B2
L, N
Electronic/conventional ballast for discharge lamps
Switching LM-DSI L, N B1, B2
up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts D1, D2
D1, D2 L, N
Fluorescent lamps
DSI dimming up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts up to 10 DALI electronic ballasts LM-2TL LM 2TL DALI
L, N D1, D2
L, N
D1, D2
B1, B2
D1, D2
Fluorescent lamps LSD option to connect a daylight sensor to the LM-STL or LM-2TL/DALI up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts up to 10 DALI electronic ballasts
D1, D2 L, N
Daylight-based dimming (DSI or DALI) DA, DA PCA
Fluorescent lamps
APD
Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps
TE
LV halogen incandescent lamps
DA, DA
LM-DALI L, N
DA, DA
B1, B2 up to 64 ballasts in 16 groups
DA, DA
DA, DA LED converter
LED luminaires
DALI dimming ONLITE interface, emergency lighting
LM-DALIS
SB 128 local check CTP
SB 64 Local check repeater
locally supplied LOCAL CHECK emergency luminaire LOCAL CHECK escape-sign luminaire
ONLITE interface for emergency lighting/local supply
Chapter 5 / 19
Chapter 6
Quickplan – calculating the n° of lum. required Efficiency method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS HF/HG PSP+ 175/200/250 (partly PSP+). . . . . PANOS LF/LG TC-DEL 175/200/250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS LG/LG PSP+ M LG TC-TEL 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS S HIT-CE 150/200/250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS L and H 200/250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS Q Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS Q High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAERO-S ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OREA GZ-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHT FIELDS surface-mounted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHT FIELDS recessed T16 M625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHT FIELDS A-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (recessed) . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (surf.-mounted) . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV – Louvre (surf.-mounted/recessed) . MELLOW LIGHT IV – Grid-mesh controller (surf.-moun./rec.) SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID T16 EVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIREL FEC2 T16 M600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIREL FEC2 T16 M625. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES – BWS T16 (surf.-mounted/rec) . . MIRAL FAC T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL FAC-ID T16 1-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL FAC-ID T16 2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II MD-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II MD-D T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II MC-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II P-ID T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II P-D T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2LIGHT E1-Mini/TC-TELI/HIT and E3 TC-L . . . . . . . . . . RTX II C or D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTX II C-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free-standing uplights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON(-I) + RW T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON(-I) + RW T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON-IP louvre T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON D-ML-B and ML-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON D-ID and I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON D-PL (Pool-Light). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA I 250 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA I 400 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA D RKF/RKID 32/42/57/85 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA D HIT 70/150 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA D 250 W QT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-B HIT/HST 250 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-B HIT/HST 400 W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-N HME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-B, A-T, A-ASY HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-ASY HIT/HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERLUCE D/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHIARO FTR390/FTR680 T16-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCUBA T26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN Classic C-O/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN Advanced A-C/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN Supreme S-C/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
Efficiency method The Quickplan graphs have been calculated using the efficiency method. The following formulae can be used to give an approximate figure for the mean illuminance and the number of luminaires required. Em =
n · z · ØL · MF · dB A
n=
Em = mean illuminance z = number of lamps per luminaire ØL = luminous flux of the lamp* dB = utilization factor (= dLB · dR ) dLB = luminaire efficiency dR = room utilization factor
Em · A z · ØL · MF · dB n = number of luminaires MF = maintenance factor A = floor area
– Standard UGR values and maintained luminance levels for luminance limit angle (e.g. 65° or 75°) all around the luminaire – Correction factors for dark rooms and different ceiling heights (no. of luminaires x factor) – Maintenance factor uses an assumed value (graphs calculated using MF = 0.8) – Uniformity: max. luminaire spacing to achieve a uniformity greater than or equal to 0.7 Please note: with maximum spacing between luminaires, the illuminance level required is usually not achieved. * Luminaire efficiency generally relates to laboratory measurements at an ambient temperature of 25 °C. For designing, it is therefore required to use the rated luminous flux levels of lamps at 25 °C in the calculation programmes and/or when applying the efficiency method.
The Lighting Handbook
Today, these values are usually calculated on a computer-aided basis, by accessing luminaire databases.
Chapter 6 / 3
140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
20
40
PANOS HF/HG 2/13 W PSP+ (175) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W (200) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W PSP+ (200) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W PSP+ (250) PANOS HF/HG 2/13 W TC-DEL (175) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W TC-DEL (250)
60
100
Floor area m
80 2
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° / *75° < 19 < 19 *200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2 < 22 < 19 1000 cd/m2 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 1000 cd/m2 200 cd/m2 < 19 < 16
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
120
140
160
180
200
2/26 W TC-DEL (250) 2/26 W PSP+ (250)
2/26 W (200) 2/26 W PSP+ (200)
2/13 W PSP+ (175)
86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6
300 lx
2/13 W TC-DEL (175)
PANOS HF/HG PSP+175/200/250 (partly PSP+)
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
4 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Uniformity Axial spacing up to 2.8 m (2/26 200), 2.9 m (2/13, 2/26 PSP+ 250) 3.2 m (2/13 PSP+, 2/26)
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 2000 h 1 year 3 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
20
40
PANOS LF/LG 2/13 W TC-DEL (175) PANOS LF/LG 2/18 W TC-DEL (200) PANOS LF/LG 2/26 W TC-DEL (250)
60
100
Floor area m2
80
120
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 75° < 22 < 22 < 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22
140
180
2/26 W (250)
2/18 W (200)
2/13 W (175)
160
PANOS LF/LG TC-DEL 175/200/250
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 5
200
86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Axial spacing up to 3.7 m (2/18 W), up to 4 m (2/13 W, 2/26 W), up to 4.4 m (2/32 W)
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 2000 h 1 year 3 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100 2
120
140
Floor area m
160
180
200
18
24
6
LG 2/32 W LG 2/32 W PSP+ M LG 2/32 W
30
10
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 28 < 25 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 1000 cd/m 2
36
300 lx
12
20
PANOS LG 2/32 W TC-TEL (250) PANOS LG 2/32 W PSP+ TC-TEL (250) PANOS M LG 2/32 W TC-TEL (250)
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
PANOS LG/LG PSP+ M LG TC-TEL 250
20
30
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
6 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Axial spacing up to 4.7
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 2000 h 1 year 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100
120
140
Floor area m2
160
180
200
3
5
12
6
1/70 W (150) FL 1/70 W (200) FL 1/70 W (250)
15
10
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 28 < 28
18
300 lx
9
20
PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-CE (150) FL G8.5 PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-CE (200) FL G12 PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-DE (250)
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
PANOS S HIT-CE 150/200/250
15
20
25
30
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 7
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Axial spacing up to 1.7 m, and 1/70 W 250 up to 4 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100 2
120
140
Floor area m
160
180
200
30
40
10
HG 2/26 W (250) HG 1/42 W PSP+ (250)
LG 1/32 W PSP+ (200)
LG 2/18 W (200)
50
10
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° / *75° *< 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 *< 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19
60
300 lx
20
20
PANOS LG 2/18 W (200) PANOS LG PSP+1/32 W (200) PANOS HG 2/26 W (250) PANOS HG 1/42 W PSP+ (250)
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
PANOS L and H 200/250
20
30
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
8 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Axial spacing up to 3.9 m for LG, and 2.9 m for HG
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 2000 h 1 year 3 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100
120
30
40
Floor area m2
140
160
180
200
10
LF + LG 1/32 W TC-TELI (190)
LM 1/32 W TC-TELI (190)
LL 1/32 W TC-TELI (190)
50
10
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 28 < 25 < 28 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 28 < 25
60
300 lx
20
20
PANOS Q LF 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) PANOS Q LG 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) PANOS Q LM 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) PANOS Q LL 1/32 W TC-TELI (190)
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
PANOS Q Low
20
30
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 9
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Max. axial spacing up to 5.8 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
40
PANOS Q HG 2/18 W TC-TELI (250) PANOS Q HG 2/26 W TC-TELI (250) PANOS Q HG 2/32 W TC-TELI (250) PANOS Q HF 2/42 W TC-TELI (250)
60
Floor area m
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 19 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 19
100 2
120
PANOS Q High
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
10 / Chapter 6 140
160
180
HF 2/42 W TC-TELI (250)
200
HG 2/32 W TC-TELI (250)
HG 2/26 W TC-TELI (250)
HG 2/18 W TC-TELI (250)
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Max. axial spacing up to 3.4 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
40
VAERO-S ID 2/28 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/35 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/49 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/54 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/80 W SR ASI1000
20
VAERO-S ID
60
100
Floor area m2
80
120
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 55° 65° <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1500 cd/m2 <13 <13 <13 <13
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 11 140
160
200
2/49 W
2/35 W
180
2/80 W
2/54 W
2/28 W
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Max. axial spacing up to 5.6 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0,77 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100 2
120
140
160
Floor area m
180
200
3
5
12
15
6
2/54 W 2/80 W
2/49 W
10
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13
18
300 lx
9
20
OREA GZ-ID 2/54 W T16 OREA GZ-ID 2/49 W T16 OREA GZ-ID 2/80 W T16
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
OREA GZ-ID T16
15
20
25
30
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
12 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 5.6 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.75 4000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
L-FIELDS A 2/28 W L-FIELDS A 2/35 W L-FIELDS A 4/14 W
40
< 16 < 16 < 16
60
< 16 < 16 < 16
100
Floor area m2
80
65° < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
120
140
180
2/35 W
2/28 W
4/14 W
160
LIGHT FIELDS surface-mounted
Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 13
200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
3.7 m (2/28 W, 2/35 W), axial spacing up to 3.4 m (2/24 W, 4/14 W)
Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.77 6000 h 1 year 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
L-FIELD 2/24 W T16 L-FIELD 2/28 W T16 L-FIELD 2/35 W T16 L-FIELD 4/14 W T16
40
< 16 < 16 < 16 < 16
60
< 16 < 16 < 16 < 16
100
Floor area m2
80
< 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2
65°
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
120
140
180
2/35 W
2/28 W
4/14 W
2/24 W
160
LIGHT FIELDS recessed T16 M625
Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
14 / Chapter 6 200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
3.7 m (2/28 W, 2/35 W), axial spacing up to 3.4 m (4/14 W)
Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.77 6000 h 1 year 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
20
40
60
100
Floor area m2
80
120
140
4/24 W
160
2/49 W
180
2/54 W
200
6
12
18
30
30
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2
36
300 lx
24
L-FIELDS A-ID 2/49 W L-FIELDS A-ID 2/54 W L-FIELDS A-ID 4/24 W
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
LIGHT FIELDS A-ID
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 15
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
3.7 m (2/49 W, 2/54 W), axial spacing up to 3.1 m (4/24 W)
Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.75 4000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
40
ML4 B EM 1/55 W TC–L M600 ML4 B EM 1/55 W TC-L M625 ML4 A EM 2/35 W T16 M625 ML4 A EM 2/49 W T16 M600 ML4 A EM 2/49 W T16 M625
Ceiling height: 3 m
60
100
120
160
180
EM 2/35 W T16 EM 2/49 W T16
140
EM 1/55 W TC-L 600
Floor area m2
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22
EM 1/55 W TC-L 625
MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (recessed)
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
16 / Chapter 6 200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Max. axial spacing up to 5.4 m (1/55 W) or 4.7 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance
MF= 0.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
40
ML4 A AM 1/54 W T16 ML4 B AM 2/24 W T16 ML4 B AM 2/24 W + 2/24 W T16 ML4 B AM 2/40 W TC-L ML4 A AM 2/49 W T16
60
100
Floor area m2
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 19 < 16 < 22 < 16 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 22 < 19
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
120
140
AM 2/49 W T16
160
180
200
AM 2/24 W + 2/24 W T16
AM 2/40 W TC-L
AM 2/24 W T16
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
AM 1/54 W T16
MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (surface-mounted)
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 17
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
6.8 m (2/24 W + 2/24 W, 2/40 W), 5.9 m (2/24 W), 4.5 m (1/54 W, 2/49 W)
Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to
Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance
MF= 0.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
40
ML IV A AC 2/35 W T16 ML IV A AC 2/49 W T16 ML IV A AC 2/54 W T16 ML IV B EC 1/55 W TC-L M625 ML IV B EC 2/24 W T16 M625 ML IV A EC 2/54 W T16 M625
60
100 2
Floor area m
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
120
140
180
EC 2/54 W T16
160
AC 2/54 W T16
AC 2/49 W T16
AC 2/35 W T16
EC 1/55 W TC-L
EC 2/24 W T16
MELLOW LIGHT IV – Louvre (surface-mounted/recessed)
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
18 / Chapter 6 200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 4 m, axial spacing up to 4.7 m (2/24 W)
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance
MF= 0.8 6000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100
Floor area m2
120
140
160
180
AB 2/49 W T16
AB 2/54 W T16
AB 2/35 W T16
200
18
24
6
EB 2/54 W T16
EB 1/55 W TC-L
EB 2/24 W T16
30
10
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 22
36
300 lx
12
20
ML IV A AB 2/35 W T16 ML IV A AB 2/49 W T16 ML IV A AB 2/54 W T16 ML IV B EB 1/55 W TC-L M625 ML IV B EB 2/24 W T16 M625 ML IV B EB 2/54 W T16 M625
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
(surface-mounted/recessed)
MELLOW LIGHT IV – Grid-mesh controller
20
30
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 19
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing, axial spacing up to 5.4 m/4.7 m (2/54 W EB)
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance
MF= 0.8 6000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
40
SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 1/35 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 1/54 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/28 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/35 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/54 W T16
60
100 2
Floor area m
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° <13 <13 < 500 cd/m 2 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <16 <16 < 1000 cd/m2
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
120
140
160
180
2/54 W
2/35 W
2/28 W
1/54 W
1/35 W
SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID T16 Electronic ballast
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
20 / Chapter 6 200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 4.8 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.77 4000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
40
MIREL FEC2 1/28 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 1/35 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 1/54 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 2/28 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 B 4/14 W T16 M600
60
100
Floor area m2
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2
120
140
MIREL FEC2 T16 M600
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 21 160
200
4/14 W
1/35 W
180
2/28 W
1/54 W
1/28 W
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
to 4.8 m (4/14 W) or 4.4 m (1/28 W, 1/35 W, 1/54 W, 2/28 W)
Uniformity Continuous row spacing up
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
40
MIREL FEC2 1/28 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 1/35 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 1/54 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 2/28 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 B 4/14 W T16 M625
60
100
Floor area m2
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2
120
140
MIREL FEC2 T16 M625
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
22 / Chapter 6 160
200
4/14 W
1/35 W
180
2/28 W
1/54 W
1/28 W
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
to 4.8 m (4/14 W) or 4,4 m (1/28 W, 1/35 W, 1/54 W, 2/28 W)
Uniformity Continuous row spacing up
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
2
120
140
200
15
5
10
20
40
60
100
Floor area m
80
160
180
4/80 W
3/80 W
2/80 W
3
6
9
1/80 W
15
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22
18
300 lx
12
MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 1/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 2/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 3/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 4/80 W T16
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
(surface-mounted/recessed)
MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES – BWS T16
20
25
30
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 23
up to 50 m² 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 3.9 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
40
60
100 2
Floor area m
80
120
140
160
180
200
2/54 W
20
6
12
18
1/49 W
1/28 W
30
30
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m2
36
300 lx
24
MIRAL FAC 1/28 W T16 MIRAL FAC 1/49 W T16 MIRAL FAC 2/54 W T16
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
MIRAL FAC T16
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
24 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Max. axial spacing up to 4.5 m (1/49 W) or 3.9 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100
120
140
Floor area m2
160
180
200
18
24
30
6
1/54 W
1/49 W
1/35 W
1/28 W
10
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 16 < 16 < 200 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 200 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2
36
300 lx
12
20
MIRAL FAC-ID 1/28 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 1/35 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 1/49 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 1/54 W T16
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
MIRAL FAC-ID T16 1-lamp
20
30
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 25
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Max. axial spacing up to 3.5 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
20
40
60
100 2
Floor area m
80
120
140
160
180
2/54 W
2/35 W 2/49 W
200
6
12
18
2/28 W
30
30
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2
36
300 lx
24
MIRAL FAC-ID 2/28 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/35 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/49 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/54 W T16
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
MIRAL FAC-ID T16 2-lamp
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
26 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Max. axial spacing up to 3.5 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
40
CLARIS II MD-ID 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 1/54 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 2/35 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 2/54 W T16
60
100
Floor area m2
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 500 cd/m 2 < 13 < 13 < 500 cd/m 2 < 16 < 13 < 13 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2
120
140
CLARIS II MD-ID T16
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 27 160
180
2/54 W
2/35 W
1/54 W
1/35 W
200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 4.0 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
20
40
CLARIS II MD-D 1/28 W T16 CLARIS II MD-D 1/49 W T16
60
100
Floor area m
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2
2
120
CLARIS II MD-D T16
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
The Lighting Handbook
28 / Chapter 6 140
160
1/49 W
1/28 W
180
200
86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 4.2 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.79 4000 h 1 year 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
40
CLARIS II MC-ID 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 1/54 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 2/35 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 2/54 W T16
60
100
Floor area m2
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 1500 cd/m2 < 13 < 13 < 16 < 16 < 13 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16
120
CLARIS II MC-ID T16
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 29 140
160
180
2/54 W
2/35 W
1/54 W
1/35 W
200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 5.4 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100
120
140
Floor area m2
160
180
200
6
10
24
30
12
1/54 W 1/49 W
1/35 W
20
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 19 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2
36
300 lx
18
20
CLARIS II P-ID 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II P-ID 1/54 W T16 CLARIS II P-ID 1/49 W T16
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
CLARIS II P-ID T16
30
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
30 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 5.3 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
20
40
CLARIS II P-D 1/28 W T16 CLARIS II P-D 1/49 W T16
60
100
Floor area m2
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 22 < 22 1000 cd/m2 < 25 < 25 1000 cd/m2
120
CLARIS II P-D T16
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 31 140
160
1/49 W
1/28 W
180
200
86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 5.2 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.79 4000 h 1 year 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
20
40
2LIGHT 1/75 W FL-S 2LIGHT 1/20 W S 2LIGHT 1/42 W E1 TC-TELI 2LIGHT 1/70 W E1 HIT G8.5 2LIGHT 1/80 W E3 TC-L 2LIGHT 2/55 W E3 TC-L
60
100
Floor area m2
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 55° / *65° / **75° *200 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 < 19 < 19 *1000 cd/m 2 200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 16 < 19 < 19 **1000 cd/m 2 **1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 22
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
120
140
160
1/70 W
1/80 W 2/55 W
1/42 W
180
1/20 W S
1/75 W FL-S
2LIGHT E1-Mini/TC-TELI/HIT and E3 TC-L
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
The Lighting Handbook
32 / Chapter 6 200
86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Axial spacing up to 3.4 m (1/42 W); up to 3.9 m (1/80 W)
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation (1/75 1000 h) Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
RTX2 1/35 W + D RTX2 1/49 W + D RTX2 1/54 W + D RTX2 2/35 W + D RTX2 2/54 W + D
40
< 16 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19
60
< 16 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 22
Floor area m2
80
65° < 200 cd/m2 < 200 cd/m2 < 200 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2
100
120
RTX II C or D
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 33 140
160
180
2/54 W
2/35 W
1/54 W
1/49 W
1/35 W
200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 4.3 m 1-lamp, up to 4 m 2-lamp
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 6000 h 1 year 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
RTX2 C-ID 1/35 W T16 RTX2 C-ID 1/49 W T16 RTX2 C-ID 2/35 W T16 RTX2 C-ID 2/54 W T16
40
60
100 2
Floor area m
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2
120
RTX II C-ID T16
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
34 / Chapter 6 140
160
180
2/54 W
2/35 W
1/49 W
1/35 W
200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 4.5 m 1-lamp, up to 3.9 m 2-lamp
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.79 4000 h 1 year 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
5
10
15
20
25
30
20
40
LIGHT FIELDS-S 3/55 W TC-L LIGHT FIELDS-S 3/80 W TC-L KAREA-S SYM 4/55 W TC-L LANOS-S SYM 4/55 W TC-L
60
100
120
140
L-FIELDS 3/80 W
Floor area m2
80
65° UGR_axial UGR_transv. <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 <13 <13 <13 <13
KAREA 4/55 W
Free-standing uplights
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 35 160
180
LANOS 4/55 W
L-FIELDS 3/55 W
200
3
6
9
12
15
18
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.3 1.7 2.2
Max. axial spacing up to 7.2 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.72 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.3 1.4 1.5
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.5 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
40
TECTON 1/54 W T16 + RW TECTON 1/54 W T16+PK+RW TECTON 2/54 W T16 + RW TECTON-I 2/54 W T16 + R
Ceiling height: 3 m
60 2
Floor area m
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 28 < 25 < 28 < 22 < 28 < 28 < 25 < 25
100
120
140
TECTON(-I) + RW T16
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
36 / Chapter 6 160
180
2/54 W -I 2/54 W
1/54 W
1/54 W+PK
200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Axial spacing up to 5.6 m/4.8 m (-I 2/54 W+R)
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.80 6000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
20
40
60
100
Floor area m2
80
120
140
1/80 W+PK
160
180
-I 2/80 W
2/80 W
1/80 W
200
6
12
18
30
30
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 28 < 25 < 28 < 22 < 28 < 28 < 25 < 25
36
300 lx
24
TECTON 1/80 W T16 + RW TECTON 1/80 W T16+PK+RW TECTON 2/80 W T16 + RW TECTON-I 2/80 W T16 + R
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
TECTON(-I) + RW T16
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 37
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Axial spacing up to 5.6 m/4.8 m (-I 2/80 W+R)
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.80 6000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
20
40
60
100 2
Floor area m
80
120
140
160
180
2/80 W
2/54 W
1/80 W
200
6
12
18
1/54 W
30
30
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 19 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22
36
300 lx
24
TECTON-IP 1/54 W T16 TECTON-IP 1/80 W T16 TECTON-IP 2/54 W T16 TECTON-IP 2/80 W T16
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
TECTON-IP Louvre T16
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
38 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Axial spacing up to 4.4 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.80 6000 h 2 years 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
40
TECTON D ML-B 2/54 W TECTON D ML-B 2/49 W TECTON D ML-C 2/49 W TECTON D ML-C 2/54 W
60
100
Floor area m2
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2
120
140
TECTON D-ML-B and ML-C
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 39 160
180
ML-C 2/54 W
ML-C 2/49 W
ML-B 2/54 W
ML-B 2/49 W
200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 4.5 m for ML-B and up to 3.9 m for ML-C
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.79 4000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100 2
120
140
Floor area m
160
180
200
9
12
3
2/80 W + ID
2/80 W + I
2/54 W + ID
2/54 W + I
15
5
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m 2
18
300 lx
6
20
TECTON D-ID 2/54 W T16 TECTON D-ID 2/80 W T16 TECTON D-I 2/54 W T16 TECTON D-I 2/80 W T16
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
TECTON D-ID and -I
10
15
20
25
30
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
40 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² ID I 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.7 1.6 2.2
Continuous row spacing D-ID up to 4.2 m, D-I up to 7 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Wartung (D-I 1/2 year) Room maintenance
MF= 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² ID I 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.3 1.5
Maintenance factor (MF)
4m 5m 6m
height
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 (1.5 for D-I) • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100
120
140
Floor area m2
160
180
200
9
12
3
2/80 W
2/49 W
2/35 W
15
5
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2
18
300 lx
6
20
TECTON D-PL 2/35 W T16 TECTON D-PL 2/49 W T16 TECTON D-PL 2/80 W T16
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
TECTON D-PL (Pool-Light)
10
15
20
25
30
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 41
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 6 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
150
200
250 2
300
350
500
9
Floor area m
400
450
3
1/250 W HSE
1/250 W HIE
12
15
5
100
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/ m2 < 16 < 19 < 1000 cd/ m2
18
300 lx
6
50
1/250 W HIE RAB 19000 lm TST 1/250 W HSE RAB 25000 lm TST
Ceiling height: 6 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
COPA I 250 W
10
15
20
25
30
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
42 / Chapter 6 MF=0.79 (HIE) 4000 h 1 year 1 year
Axial spacing up to 5 m (TST)
Uniformity
Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) Room maintenance
Maintenance factor (MF)
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
MF=0.83 (HSE) 8000 h 3 years 3 years
5
10
50
100
150
250
Floor area m2
200
300
350
400
1/400 W
450
HSE**
1/400 W HSE*
500
3
6
9 1/400 W HIE
15
15
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65°/75° < 19 75°< 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 75°< 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 16 < 16 65°< 1000 cd/m2
18
300 lx
12
1/400 W HIE RAB 36000 lm 1/400 W HSE RAB 36000 lm* 1/400 W HSE RAB 47000 lm**
Ceiling height: 6 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
COPA I 400 W
20
25
30
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 43
MF=0.70 (HIE) 2000 h 1 year 1 year
* (Colour rendition Ra > 60) ** (Colour rendition Ra > 20)
Axial spacing up to 8.3 m
Uniformity
Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) Room maintenance
Maintenance factor (MF)
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
MF=0.83 (HSE) 8000 h 3 years 3 years
60
80
100
120
140
Floor area m2
160
180
200
18
24
30
6
1/85 W
1/57 W
1/42 W
1/32 W
10
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° / 75° < 16 65°< 200 cd/m2 < 16 < 19 75°< 200 cd/m2 < 19 < 25 < 25 < 22 75°< 1000 cd/m2 < 22 < 19 65°< 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 19 65°< 1000 cd/m2
36
300 lx
12
20
COPA D 1/32 W RKF/RKID COPA D 1/42 W RKF/RKID COPA D 1/57 W RKF COPA D 1/57 W RKID COPA D 1/85 W RKF COPA D 1/85 W RKID
Ceiling height: 4 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
COPA D RKF/RKID 32/42/57/85 W
20
30
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
44 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2
Axial spacing up to 5 m, up to 5.4 m (42 W RKF), up to 5.7 m (42 W RKID, 57 W RKF, RKID)
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.78 Lamp operation 2000 h Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) 1 year Room maintenance 2 years
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
5
10
20
40
60
100
Floor area m2
80
120
140
160
1/150 W
180
200
3
6
9
1/70 W
15
15
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° / *75° < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 22 < 22 *< 1000 cd/m2
18
300 lx
12
COPA D 1/70 W HIT (6400 lm) COPA D 1/150 W HIT (14000 lm)
Ceiling height: 4 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
COPA D HIT 70/150 W
20
25
30
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 45
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2
Axial spacing up to 4 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.77 (HCI) Lamp operation 2000 h Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) 1 year Room maintenance 2 years
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
80
65° <1000 cd/m2
100
120
140
Floor area m2
160
1/250 W
180
200
18
24
30
6
60
< 19
10
40
< 19
36
300 lx
12
20
COPA D 1/250 W QT
Ceiling height: 4 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
COPA D 250 W QT
20
30
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
46 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4
Axial spacing up to 4.5 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance
MF= 0.76 1000 h 1 year 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
5
10
15
20
25
30
50
100 2
Floor area m
200
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 28 < 28 < 28 < 25 < 28 < 28 < 25
150
COPA A-B 1/250 W HIT (20000 lm) COPA A-B 1/250 W HST (23000 lm) COPA A-B 2/250 W HIT (40000 lm) COPA A-B 2/250 W HST (46000 lm)
250
300
350
COPA A-B HIT/HST 250 W
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 6 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 47 400
450
2/250 W HIT
2/250 W HST
1/250 W HST
1/250 W HIT
500
3
6
9
12
15
18
300 lx
MF=0.80 (HIT) 2000 h 1 year 2 years
MF=0.81 (HST) 14000 h 1 year 2 years
Axial spacing up to: 7.5 m HST, up to 8.3 m 2/250 W HIT, up to 9 m 1/250 W HIT
Uniformity
Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) Room maintenance
Maintenance factor (MF)
Correction factors â&#x20AC;˘ Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
5
10
15
20
25
30
50
100
250
Floor area m
200
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 28 < 28 < 28 < 28
150
COPA A_B 1/400 W HIT (32000 lm) * COPA A_B 1/400 W HST (48000 lm) **
2
300
350
COPA A-B HIT/HST 400 W
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 6 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
48 / Chapter 6 400
450
1/400 W HST
1/400 W HIT
500
3
6
9
12
15
18
300 lx
MF=0.67 (HIT) 1000 h 1 year 2 years
* (Colour rendition Ra > 90) ** (Colour rendition Ra > 20)
Axial spacing up to 9 m
Uniformity
Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) Room maintenance
Maintenance factor (MF)
Correction factors â&#x20AC;˘ Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
MF=0.81 (HST) 14000 h 1 year 2 years
10
20
30
40
50
60
50
100
250
Floor area m2
200
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 28 < 28 < 29 < 29
150
COPA A-N 1/250 W HME (13000 lm) COPA A-N 1/400 W HME (22000 lm)
300
COPA A-N HME
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 6 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 49 350
400
450
1/400 W
1/250 W
500
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
Axial spacing up to 9 m
Uniformity
Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance
Maintenance factor (MF) MF= 0.80 2000 h 1 year 2 years
Correction factors â&#x20AC;˘ Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
2
4
6
8
10
50
100
COPA A-B 1/600 W HST COPA A-T 1/600 W HST COPA A-ASY 1/600 W HST
Ceiling height: 6 m
150
< 25
250 2
Floor area m
200
< 28
UGR_axial UGR_transv.
300
350
A-B 1/600 W A-ASY 1/600 W
COPA A-B, A-T, A-ASY HST
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
50 / Chapter 6 400
450
A-T 1/600 W
500
1
2
3
4
5
6
300 lx
MF= 0.83 10000 h 2 years 2 years
Axial spacing up to 6.3 m (ASY), up to 7.5 m (A-B)
Uniformity
Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance
Maintenance factor (MF)
Correction factors â&#x20AC;˘ Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
5
10
15
20
25
30
50
100
150
COPA A-ASY 1/250 W HIT (20000 lm) COPA A-ASY 1/250 W HST (27000 lm) COPA A-ASY 1/400 W HIT (32000 lm) COPA A-ASY 1/400 W HST (48000 lm)
Ceiling height: 6 m
250 2
Floor area m
200
300
350
400
450
1/400 W HIT
1/250 W HST
1/400 W HST
1/250 W HIT
COPA A-ASY HIT/HST
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 51
500
3
6
9
12
15
18
300 lx
Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance
Maintenance factor (MF) MF= 0.81 (HST) 14000 h 2 years 2 years
Correction factors â&#x20AC;˘ Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
20
60
100
Floor area m
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 16 < 16 <1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 19 <1000 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 19
40
PERLUCE D 1/49 W T16 PERLUCE D 1/80 W T16 PERLUCE O 2/18 W TC-L PERLUCE O 1/49 W T16
2
120
PERLUCE D/O
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
The Lighting Handbook
52 / Chapter 6 140
160
180
O 1/49 W T16 D 1/49 W T16 D 1/80 W T16
O 2/18 W TC-L
200
86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6
300 lx
MF= 0.79 (D) 4000 h 2 years 2 years
(O) MF= 0.83 (O) 2000 h 1 year 1 year
Axial spacing up to 3.9 m (D) and up to 6.5 m (O)
Uniformity
Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) Room maintenance
Maintenance factor (MF) (D)
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 (O=1.25)
10
20
40
100
120
2/36 W T26
20
60
Floor area m2
80
140
160
180
2/54 W T16
1/80 W T16
200
6
12
18
1/58 W T26
30
30
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 28 < 22 < 29 < 25 < 28 < 22 < 29 < 22
36
300 lx
24
RAIN 1/58 W T 26 RAIN 1/80 W T 16 RAIN 2/36 W T 26 RAIN 2/54 W T 16
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
RAIN
40
50
60
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 53
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 8 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 6000 h 1 year 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100 2
120
Floor area m
140
160
180
22+ 40 W
1/55 W
200
18
24
30
6
2/40 W
1/40 W
36
42
48
10
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22
54
300 lx
12
20
CHIARO FTR 1/40 W T16-R CHIARO FTR 1/55 W T16-R CHIARO FTR 1/22 W+40W T16-R CHIARO FTR 2/40 W T16-R
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
CHIARO FTR390/FTR680 T16-R
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
54 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Axial spacing up to 4.5 m, up to 5 m 2/40 W
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
MF= 0.76 6000 h 1 year 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
5
10
15
20
25
30
20
SCUBA 1/36 W T26 SCUBA 1/58 W T26 SCUBA 2/36 W T26 SCUBA 2/58 W T26
Ceiling height: 3 m
40
60
100
120
SCUBA T26
Floor area m2
80
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 22
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 55 140
160
2/58 W
2/36 W
1/58 W
1/36 W
180
200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 8.5 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 6000 h 1 year 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area
60
80
100 2
120
140
200
9
12
15
Floor area m
160
180
3
C-R 3/55 W TC-L
C-O 3/40 W TC-L
C-O 4/24 W T16
5
40
UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 22 < 25 < 25 < 19 < 22
18
300 lx
6
20
CLEAN C-O 4/24 W T16 CLEAN C-O 3/40 W TC-L CLEAN C-R 3/55 W TC-L
Ceiling height: 3 m
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
CLEAN C-O/R
10
15
20
25
30
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
56 / Chapter 6 up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 4.5 m, with 3/55 W up to 3.9 m
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation (-O = 4000 h) Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 3000 h 2 years 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
60
100
Floor area m2
80
65°/75° UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 1000 cd/m2 < 16 < 19 < 22 < 22 < 19 < 19 75° < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 75° < 1000 cd/m2
40
CLEAN A-C 2/49 W T16 CLEAN A-O 2/49 W T16 CLEAN A-C 3/40 W TC-L CLEAN A-C 3/55 W TC-L
120
CLEAN A-C/O
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
Chapter 6 / 57 140
160
180
A-C 3/55 W TC-L
A-C 2/49 W T16
A-C 3/40 W TC-L
A-O 2/49 W T16
200
6
12
18
24
30
36
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
to 3.9 m (2/49 W A-C), up to 4.5 m (2/49 W A-O), up to 4.2 m (TC-L)
Uniformity Continuous row spacing up
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation (TC-L 3000 h) Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance
MF= 0.78 4000 h (T16) 2 years 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
5
10
15
20
25
30
20
CLEAN S-C 3/49 W CLEAN S-C 3/80 W CLEAN S-R 2/49 W
40
< 16 < 19 < 22
60
< 19 < 19 < 22
2
Floor area m
80
75° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 1000 cd/m 2
100
120
CLEAN S-C/R
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.
500 lx
The Lighting Handbook
58 / Chapter 6 140
160
180
S-C 3/80 W
S-C 3/49 W
S-R 2/49 W
200
3
6
9
12
15
18
300 lx
up to 50 m² 1.2 1.4 1.6
Continuous row spacing up to 3.9 m and up to 4.5 m (2/49 S-R)
Uniformity
Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance
MF= 0.79 4000 h 2 years 2 years
over 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance factor (MF)
height 4m 5m 6m
Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area
Chapter 7
Technical information Protection classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explosion-proofness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements concerning safety – ball-proofness . . . . . Clean-room technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical effects on materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short-circuit protection and loading of circuits . . . . . . . Low-voltage installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 3–5 6–7 8–9 10 11 – 13 14 – 16 17 – 24 25 – 27
Protection classes ZUMTOBEL luminaires are classified into the following protection classes – a measure intended to afford protection against electric shock. Class I luminaires Class I is not identified by a symbol; the luminaire is intended to be connected to a protective earth conductor which bears the mark. Most ZUMTOBEL luminaires are designed in accordance with protection class I unless otherwise stated. Class II luminaires Class II luminaires have total insulation but no protective earth terminal. The ZUMTOBEL range includes protection class II luminaires, for instance moisture-proof batten luminaires and moisture-proof diffuser luminaires. Class III luminaires Class III identifies luminaires that are intended for operation with protective extra low voltage (50 V max.). ZUMTOBEL architectural luminaires include class III luminaires, e.g. PRIO low-voltage spotlights. Protection class I Protection class II Protection class III
Degrees of protection Degrees of protection indicate the following properties of equipment:
The Lighting Handbook
– The quality of its protection against direct contact – Its sealing against ingress of solid foreign bodies (dust, stones, sand, etc.) – Its sealing against the ingress of water
Chapter 7 / 3
The type of protection is defined by two degrees of protection in accordance with IEC 529: – Degree of shock-hazard protection and protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies (1st digit) – Degree of protection against the ingress of water (2nd digit) For example IP 23: IP
2
3
INGRESS PROTECTION Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies having Ø > 12 mm (medium-sized solid bodies), insertion of fingers or objects. Protection against ingress of water falling at any angle up to 60º from vertical. There must be no adverse effect (spray water).
Degrees of protection for technical luminaires Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies as per first digit IP 0X IP 1X IP 2X IP 3X IP 4X IP 5X IP 6X
Unprotected against ingress of solid foreign bodies Protection against solid bodies > 50 mm Protection against solid bodies > 12 mm Protection against solid bodies > 2.5 mm Protection against solid bodies > 1 mm Dust-protected (limited ingress of dust) Dust-tight (no ingress of dust)
IP X0 IP X1 IP X2 IP X3 IP X4 IP X5 IP X6 IP X7 IP X8
No special protection Drip-proof – protection against water drops Protection against water drops up to 15º from the vertical Rainproof – protection against spray water up to 60º Splash-proof – protection against spray water from all directions Jet-proof – protection against jets of water Protection against heavy seas (conditions on ship decks) Watertight – protection against immersion (pressure and time specified) Protection against immersion under pressure (with instructions from manufacturer)
4 / Chapter 7
The Lighting Handbook
Protection against moisture as per second digit
Applications for luminaires with increased protection Damp locations Bakeries Manure sheds Animal-feed preparation facilities Industrial kitchens Boiler rooms Commercial workshops Granaries (Deep-freeze) cold storage Pump houses Sculleries Laundries Wet locations
IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP 20 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1
The following generally applies: IP X5: for cleaning using water jets IP X4: in rinsing areas
Beer or wine cellars Shower cubicles Meat processing facilities Electroplating facilities Greenhouses Dairies Workshops using wet processes Car wash areas Agricultural facilities
IP X4 IP X4 IP X5 IP X4 IP X4 IP X4 IP X4 IP X4
The following generally applies: IP X5: for cleaning using water jets
The Lighting Handbook
Beer or wine cellars IP 44 Shower cubicles IP 44 Stores, storerooms for hay, straw, feedstuff IP 44 Intensive stock farming IP 44 Animal sheds IP 44 Adjoining rooms of animal sheds IP 44 Facilities with increased fire risk Workrooms Woodworking Sawmills Paper processing Textile processing Treatment and fabrication Gymnasia and sports halls
IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50
Badminton courts Squash courts Indoor tennis courts Gymnasia and sports halls
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
The following generally applies: IP X5: for cleaning using water jets IP 54+FF: when increased fire risk
ballproof luminaires ballproof luminaires with all-round cover; maximum mesh size 60 mm
Chapter 7 / 5
Fire protection Luminaire identification marking The following criteria must be taken into account: – Position of normal use – Fire behaviour of environment and mounting surfaces – Minimum clearance from combustible substances and materials Luminaires with thecmark Luminaires which carry thecmark must be constructed so that the temperature on the mounting surface does not exceed 130 °C during abnormal operation, and does not exceed 180 °C in the event of a ballast fault. Luminaires with this mark are suitable for direct mounting on parts of buildings made of non-combustible, flame-retardant or normally flammable building materials according to DIN 4102. Luminaires with the d/Umark Both marks regulate the surface temperatures of luminaires. External surfaces on which readily flammable substances such as dust or fibrous materials may accumulate when luminaires are installed as prescribed must not exceed specific temperatures. The d luminaire mark was withdrawn in 1999. A validity transition period allows the d mark to be used until 01. 08. 2005. TheUmark introduced in EN 60598 has applied since 01.08.1998. The d mark limits the temperature on horizontal surfaces to 95 °C during normal operation and 115 °C in the event of a ballast fault. Temperatures must not exceed 220 °C on vertical surfaces. In order to fulfil the criteria of the Umark, the surface temperature on horizontal surfaces must not exceed 90 °C. The maximum temperature in the event of a fault is 115 °C, the same as for the d mark. The temperature must not exceed 150 °C on vertical surfaces.
Luminaires with the q mark Luminaires which carry the q mark are intended for mounting in or on furniture made of materials whose flammability is not known. They are designed so that in normal operation any mounting surface or other adjacent furniture surfaces do not exceed a temperature of 95 °C. 6 / Chapter 7
The Lighting Handbook
Luminaires with theQmark Luminaires which carry theQmark are intended for installation in furniture. They are designed so that in the event of a ballast fault, flame-retardant and normally flammable materials as specified in DIN 4102 cannot be ignited, e.g. in corners of wooden furniture. The materials may be painted, veneered or varnished.
The Lighting Handbook
Fire protection: Place of use – Mark – Requirements
Chapter 7 / 7
Explosion-proofness Flammable gases, vapours and mists Zone O: A hazardous explosive atmosphere is present continuously or long term. Zone 1: A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to occur occasionally. Zone 2: A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to occur only rarely and, if any, short term. Combustible dusts Zone 20 includes areas in which there is a permanent, longterm or frequent explosive atmosphere consisting of dust-air mixtures. Zone 21 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere consisting of dust-air mixtures can be expected to occur occasionally and short term. Zone 22 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere cannot be expected to occur due to disturbance of deposited dust. If an explosive atmosphere should nevertheless occur, this will most probably happen only rarely and short term.
Directive 99/92 EC (Workplace Directive) Also new is the description of hazard areas in explosion-prone workplaces, and a resulting graded safety profile for the “equipment” used. As this Directive was drafted according to the EC’s “new approach”, the manufacturer’s declaration of conformity, combined with CE marking of the products, was introduced 8 / Chapter 7
The Lighting Handbook
Directive 94/9/EC The “new” Directive 94/9/EC specifies the requirements for all devices and protection systems for use in explosion-prone areas. Over and above this, this Directive now directly includes the “basic safety requirements” for explosion-proof equipment. Manufacturers of explosion-proof equipment have to provide evidence of a quality assurance system to be tested by a “notified body”.
for explosion-proof equipment as well. A detailed commentary on Directive 94/9/EC is included in the “Directive 94/9/EC by the European Parliament and the Council of 23 March 1994” section. Since 1 July 2003, it has superseded all directives on explosion protection previously effective at European level. Please note: The previous standard on construction and testing of explosion-proof equipment for Zone 2 has been superseded by ILC 60079-15/EN 60079-15, which specifies higher requirements for Zone 2 luminaires (higher requirements in terms of electronic ballasts and impact resistance).
Equipment of Group 2 including potential ignition source Equipment cat. 1
Equipment cat. 2 Electrical appliance
Yes
Equipment cat. 3
No Engine with internal combustion
EC type examination
Documentation of notified body
Documentation of manufacturer
Internal production control
Basic safety and health requirements
Classification of max. surface temperatures in electrical equipment of Class 2
The Lighting Handbook
Temperature class T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
Max. permissible surface temperature of equipment in °C
Ignition temperatures of flammable substances in °C
450 300 200 135 100 85
> 450 > 300 ≤ 450 > 300 ≤ 200 > 200 ≤ 135 > 100 ≤ 135 > 85 ≤ 100
Chapter 7 / 9
Requirements concerning safety â&#x20AC;&#x201C; ball-proofness Luminaires for sports halls must be ball-proof according to DIN VDE 0710-13. Balls hitting luminaires must not damage them so as to cause luminaire parts to fall down. In a test conforming with the relevant standard, the luminaire has to withstand 36 hits from three directions at a maximum impact speed of 60 km/h, the ball used having the size of a handball. When choosing the luminaires, the rod guardâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s grid width must be matched to the sport played in the hall: it must always be considerably smaller than the balls used, never of the same size, as balls may get stuck in the guard.
10 / Chapter 7
The Lighting Handbook
As ball-proof luminaires, the ZUMTOBEL range includes the RAS/RES-BWS louvre luminaire as well as the COPA-A high-bay luminaire.
Clean-room technology Clean-room compatibility tested CLEAN Advanced and CLEAN Supreme have been tested and assessed by the Fraunhofer Institute in Stuttgart (Germany) with respect to – clean-room compatibility for clean-rooms (particle emission behaviour of the luminaires) and – cleanliness compatibility (disinfectability, electrostatic behaviour and chemical resistance).
Details on clean-room compatibility: The German VDI 2083 Guideline specifies a standardised procedure for all equipment used in a clean-room. The common criterion for the clean-room compatibility of luminaires and all other equipment is their particle emission behaviour. “Airborne particle emission” is used as a classification criterion in all international standards. The relevant maximum value for the permissible concentration of particles of a specific particle size constitutes the class limit.
The Lighting Handbook
Test setup A defined volume of air is aspirated by an air sampling probe and fed into a test chamber. The particles inside this test chamber are monitored and recorded appropriately. Exceeding the relevant limit values is decisive in order to classify the luminaires. If a limit value is not exceeded with a certainty of at least 95 %, the respective item of equipment may be regarded as suitable for use in this air cleanliness class.
Chapter 7 / 11
Details on cleanliness compatibility: In order to be able to confirm cleanliness compatibility as well as quantities reflecting clean-room compatibility that can be detected by metrological methods, additional expert assessments and parameters were included in the tests conducted by the Fraunhofer Institute IPA. Cleanliness compatibility covers a large number of sector-based cleanliness requirements such as resistance to chemicals, surface quality, flow behaviour or electrostatic charge characteristics. These are defined in the following standards and codes of practice, among others: Standardisation General: – classification of air cleanliness – clean-rooms and associated controlled environments according to DIN EN ISO 14644-1 (Federal Standard 209 has been withdrawn) – clean-room technology and clean-room compatibility of equipment VDI 2083 – EHEDG (European Hygienic Engineering & Design Group) Industrial application areas: – GMP Guidelines (Good Manufacturing Practice) – pharmaceuticals – FDA (Food and Drug Administration) – pharmaceuticals and foodstuffs – Medicinal Product Law – EU Pharmaceutical Regulation – Good manufacturing practices Volume 4 – (Medicinal products for human and veterinary use) – Hazard Analytical Control Point (HACCP) Regulations – foodstuffs
12 / Chapter 7
The Lighting Handbook
Hospital application areas: – VDI 2167 Building services in hospitals – DIN 1946-4 Ventilation and air conditioning Part 4 (Ventilation in hospitals)
Airflow systems in clean-rooms: One of the basic criteria for the requirements placed on equipment in clean-rooms is the nature of the airflow system. The CLEAN clean-room luminaire has been designed for use in all clean-room classes with a turbulent mixed airflow. In this commonly encountered airflow system, air enters the room with a turbulent flow, thereby causing continuous dilution and â&#x20AC;&#x153;cleaningâ&#x20AC;?. According to GMP (Good Manufacturing Practice) classification, clean-room Classes C to E and ISO Classes 6 to 9 can be achieved using this airflow system.
The Lighting Handbook
Clean-rooms with low-turbulence displacement flow, which are more expensive to build, allow air to initially enter the cleanroom with low turbulence. The design of laminar flow cleanrooms precludes the use of any luminaires other than extremely slim batten luminaires which disrupt the directional flow of air as little as possible. The laminar flow system minimises contamination, and any contaminant is quickly eliminated. Cleanrooms in ISO Classes 1 to 6 and GMP Classes A and B are areas where this airflow system is used.
Chapter 7 / 13
Chemical effects on materials No material is resistant to all chemical influences. The effects of chemicals vary widely and take up entire volumes of resistance tables. The table on the opposite page can therefore only give a brief overview of effects of some frequently occurring chemicals and is subject to the following conditions: – The chemical substance listed in the table is a basic material and not part of a chemical compound. – The ambient temperature is 22 °C. A great many complaints could be avoided if due consideration were given during the planning stage to the situation in which the luminaire is going to be used. What are the key factors?
2. Applications The following applications are just a few examples of situations in which material damage may occur: – Chemical and petrochemical industry – Foodstuffs industry (cheese production, dairies, meat processing, breweries) – Agriculture – Fishing industry – Kitchens and industrial cooking facilities – Car wash facilities – Production facilities and workshops using a high level of oil and grease 3. Chemical composition The chemical composition should be discussed with every operator. 4. Degree of saturation of chemical substances
1. Luminaire materials
14 / Chapter 7
5. Ambient temperature Depending on the type and composition of the substances, chemical reactions will take place over a range of temperatures. We should be glad to provide further advice if you have any questions or doubts about the resistance of any materials.
The Lighting Handbook
A luminaire consists of several parts having different functions and which are therefore made from different materials (base plate, cover, seal, closures, cable inlets, etc.).
The Lighting Handbook
Chemical substance in question
Stainless Alusteel minium
Acetic acid up to 5 % Acetic acid up to 30 % Acetone Alcohol up to 30 % Alcohol, concentrated Aliphatic hydrocarbons Ammonia 25 % Aniline Aromatic hydrocarbons Battery acid Beer Benzene Blood Bromic acid Carbon dioxide Carbon monoxide Carbon tetrachloride Caustic soda solution 2 % Caustic soda solution 10 % Chloroform Chlorophenol Diesel oil, crude oil Dioxan Ether Ethyl acetate (ester) Glycerine Glycol Glysantin Hydrochloric acid up to 20 % above 20 % Hydrogen peroxide up to 40 % over 40 %
Poly- Polymeth- Polyester acrylate..carbonate
• • • • •
• – • • •
• • – • •
• – – • –
• • – • –
• • •
• • •
• – –
• • –
• – –
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • – • • • – – • • • • • • • • •
• • • – • – • • • • – – – • • • – • • •
– • • – • – • • – • • – – • – – – • • •
– • • – • – • • – – – – – • – – – • • •
– –
– •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
– –
– •
• •
• = resistant, • = resistant to limited extent, – = not resistant
Chapter 7 / 15
Chemical substance in question
Stainless Alusteel minium
Ketones Lime milk Lysol Methylene chloride Methanol Metal salts and their aqueous solutions Naphtha (cleaner’s naphtha) Petrolium ether Pyridine Phenol Nitric acid up to 10 % up to 20 % above 20 % Sea water Soap-suds Soda Sodium chloride solution Sulphuretted hydrogen Sulphuric acid up to 50 % up to 70 % above 70 % Sulphurous acid up to 5 % Synthetic detergents Turpentine Water up to 60°C Xylene
Poly- Polymeth- Polyester acrylate..carbonate
• • • • •
• – • • •
– • – – –
– • – – –
– • – – –
• • • • •
– • • • •
• • • – –
• • • – –
• • • – –
• • • • • • • •
– – • • • – • •
• • – • • • • •
• • – • • • • •
• • – • • • • •
– – –
– – –
• • –
• • –
• • –
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • –
• • • • –
– • • • –
16 / Chapter 7
The Lighting Handbook
• = resistant, • = resistant to limited extent, – = not resistant
Short-circuit protection and loading of circuits Miniature circuit breakers Trip characteristic B C D
Rangeh over 3 ln to 5 ln over 5 ln to 10 ln over 10 ln to 20 ln
Maximum number of fluorescent lamps per miniature circuit breaker Number of fluorescent lamps with conventional or low-loss ballast for different lamp circuits C10 C16 n.k./p.k. n.k./p.k. 1/18 W T26 44/53 73/86 1/36–38 W T26 38/53 63/86 1/58 W T26 25/34 40/56 1/5–7 W TC-S 83/135 136/221 1/9 W TC-S 93/135 153/221 1/11 W TC-S 104/135 170/221 1/10–13 W TC-D 72/122 119/200 1/18 W TC-D/-T 62/91 102/149 1/26 W TC-D/-T 43/68 71/112 1/18 W TC-L/-F 44/53 73/86 1/24 W TC-L/-F 41/53 68/86 1/36 W TC-L/-F 38/53 62/86 n. k. = no p.f. correction (inductive)
B10 B16 B20 n.k./p.k. n.k./p.k. n.k./p.k. 27/32 43/51 53/63 23/32 37/51 46/63 15/20 24/33 30/41 50/81 80/130 100/162 56/81 90/130 112/162 63/81 100/130 125/162 44/74 70/118 87/147 37/55 60/88 75/110 26/41 42/66 52/82 27/32 43/51 53/63 25/32 40/51 50/63 23/32 37/51 46/63 p. k. = shunt p.f. correction
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for metal halide lamps – Maximum recommended number of electronic ballasts per automatic circuit breaker
The Lighting Handbook
Electronic ballasts for metal halide lamps, non-dimmable (TRIDONIC.ATCO PCI series, except for PCI... A101/A201/A202)
1/20 W HI 1/35 W HI 2/35 W HI 1/70 W HI 2/70 W HI 1/100 W HI 1/150 W HI
C10 1.5 mm2 30 30 14 14 7 10 7
C13 1.5 mm2 40 40 25 25 14 18 14
C16 1.5 mm2 50 50 36 36 20 26 20
C20 2.5 mm2 60 60 42 42 20 30 20
B10 1.5 mm2 15 15 8 8 4 6 4
B13 1.5 mm2 20 20 14 14 6 10 6
B16 1.5 mm2 25 25 18 18 7 13 7
B20 2.5 mm2 30 30 18 18 7 13 7
Depending on type of unit, a larger number of units may be possible.
Chapter 7 / 17
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for electronic ballasts for fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Maximum recommended number of electronic ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps, non-dimming (TRIDONIC.ATCO PC T5 PRO lp series) C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 1x14/21/28/35 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2x14/21/28/35 W T16 18 24 28 34 9 12 14 17 3/14 W T16 26 38 44 64 13 19 22 32 4/14 W T16 26 38 44 64 13 19 22 32 1/24 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/24 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 3/24 W T16 14 18 22 28 7 9 11 14 4/24 W T16 14 18 22 28 7 9 11 14 1/39 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/39 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 18 1/49 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/49 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 18 1/54 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/54 W T16 14 20 24 30 7 10 12 15 1/80 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 22 2/80 W T16 8 14 16 20 4 7 8 10
1/18 W 2/18 W 3/18 W 4/18 W 1/30 W 2/30 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 3/36 W 1/58 W 2/58 W 1/70 W 2/70 W
T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26
18 / Chapter 7
C10 1.5 mm2 44 36 40 30 40 22 38 24 18 36 16 36 16
C13 1.5 mm2 62 50 60 40 52 30 52 32 24 50 22 50 22
C16 1.5 mm2 74 60 80 52 60 38 60 38 32 60 26 60 26
C20 2.5 mm2 104 72 92 64 72 42 72 44 40 70 30 70 30
B10 1.5 mm2 22 18 20 15 19 11 19 12 9 18 8 18 8
B13 1.5 mm2 31 25 30 20 26 15 26 16 12 25 11 25 11
B16 1.5 mm2 37 30 40 26 30 19 30 19 16 30 13 30 13
B20 2.5 mm2 52 36 46 32 36 21 36 22 20 35 15 35 15
The Lighting Handbook
Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps, non-dimming (TRIDONIC.ATCO PC T8 PRO series)
Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps, dimmable (TRIDONIC.ATCO PCA T5 ECO/EXCEL one4all (lp) series)
1/14 W 2/14 W 3/14 W 4/14 W 1/21 W 2/21 W 1/28 W 2/28 W 1/35 W 2/35 W 1/24 W 2/24 W 1/39 W 2/39 W 1/49 W 2/49 W 1/54 W 2/54 W 1/80 W 2/80 W
T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16
C10 1.5 mm2 50 38 16 16 50 30 38 24 34 16 50 24 34 16 24 12 24 12 14 10
C13 1.5 mm2 80 54 26 24 80 40 54 34 50 22 80 34 50 22 34 18 34 18 20 14
C16 1.5 mm2 150 78 34 34 120 60 78 48 76 30 150 48 70 30 48 26 48 26 28 20
C20 2.5 mm2 180 92 42 38 150 64 92 52 86 32 180 52 86 32 52 26 52 26 28 22
B10 1.5 mm2 25 19 8 8 25 15 19 12 17 8 25 12 17 8 12 6 12 6 7 5
B13 1.5 mm2 40 27 13 12 40 20 27 17 25 11 40 17 25 11 17 9 17 9 10 7
B16 1.5 mm2 75 39 17 17 60 30 39 24 38 15 75 24 38 15 24 13 24 13 14 10
B20 2.5 mm2 90 46 21 19 75 32 46 26 43 16 90 26 43 16 26 13 26 13 14 11
The Lighting Handbook
Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps, dimmable (TRIDONIC.ATCO PCA T8 ECO/EXCEL one4all series)
1/18 W 2/18 W 3/18 W 4/18 W 1/30 W 2/30 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 1/38 W 2/38 W 1/58 W 2/58 W
T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26
C10 1.5 mm2 30 20 16 12 30 10 30 10 30 10 20 10
C13 1.5 mm2 50 30 18 16 50 20 50 20 50 20 30 20
C16 1.5 mm2 76 40 24 24 70 30 70 30 70 30 40 30
C20 2.5 mm2 80 46 30 28 76 30 76 30 76 30 46 30
B10 1.5 mm2 15 10 8 6 15 5 15 5 15 5 10 5
B13 1.5 mm2 25 15 9 8 25 10 25 10 25 10 15 10
B16 1.5 mm2 38 20 12 12 35 15 35 15 35 15 20 15
B20 2.5 mm2 40 23 15 14 38 15 38 15 38 15 23 15
Chapter 7 / 19
Electronic ballasts for TC-L fluorescent lamps, non-dimmable (TRIDONIC.ATCO PC TCL PRO series)
1/18 W 2/18 W 1/24 W 2/24 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 1/40 W 2/40 W 1/55 W 2/55 W
TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L
C10 1.5 mm2 30 24 30 24 38 24 38 14 28 8
C13 1.5 mm2 40 32 40 32 54 34 54 24 38 14
C16 1.5 mm2 48 38 48 38 76 44 78 28 50 18
C20 2.5 mm2 60 46 60 46 90 50 90 34 60 20
B10 1.5 mm2 15 12 15 12 19 12 19 7 14 4
B13 1.5 mm2 20 16 20 16 27 17 27 12 19 7
B16 1.5 mm2 24 19 24 19 38 22 39 14 25 9
B20 2.5 mm2 30 23 30 23 45 25 45 17 30 10
Electronic ballasts for TC-L compact fluorescent lamps, Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC.ATCO PCA TCL ECO/ EXCEL one4all series)
TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L
20 / Chapter 7
C13 1.5 mm2 12 20 50 20 50 20 30 14 20
C16 1.5 mm2 16 24 70 30 70 30 40 18 30
C20 2.5 mm2 20 30 76 30 76 30 46 20 30
B10 1.5 mm2 5 8 15 5 15 5 10 5 5
B13 1.5 mm2 6 10 25 10 25 10 15 7 10
B16 1.5 mm2 8 12 35 15 35 15 20 9 15
B20 2.5 mm2 10 15 38 15 38 15 23 10 15
The Lighting Handbook
2/18 W 2/24 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 1/40 W 2/40 W 1/55 W 2/55 W 1/80 W
C10 1.5 mm2 10 16 30 10 30 10 20 10 10
Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL fluorescent lamps, nondimmable (TRIDONIC.ATCO PC PRO series)
1/9 W TC-SEL 2/9 W TC-SEL 1/10 W TC-DEL 2/10 W TC-DEL 1/11 W TC-SEL 2/11 W TC-SEL 1/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL
C10 1.5 mm2 48 32 46 32 48 32 46 32 48 48 34 22 34 22/14 34 14
C13 1.5 mm2 72 44 70 44 72 44 70 44 72 72 46 32 46 32/18 46 18
C16 1.5 mm2 80 54 78 52 80 54 78 52 80 80 74 38 74 38/22 74 22
C20 B10 2.5 1.5 mm2 mm2 100 24 64 16 98 23 60 16 100 24 64 16 98 23 60 16 100 24 100 24 84 17 44 11 84 17 44/30 11/7 84 17 30 7
B13 B16 B20 1.5 1.5 2.5 mm2 mm2 mm2 36 40 50 22 27 32 35 39 49 22 26 30 36 40 50 22 27 32 35 39 49 22 26 30 36 40 50 36 40 50 23 37 42 16 19 22 23 37 42 16/9 19/11 22/15 23 37 42 9 11 15
Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL compact fluorescent lamps, Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC.ATCO PCA TCD/TCT ECO/EXCEL one4all series)
The Lighting Handbook
1/11 W TC-SEL 2/11 W TC-SEL 1/13 W TC-DEL 2/13 W TC-DEL 1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/57 W TC-TEL
C10 C13 1.5 1.5 mm2 mm2 40 60 28 40 40 60 28 40 30 50 22 32 30 50 22 32 26 38 10 18 26 38 12 18 12 16
C16 C20 1.5 2.5 mm2 mm2 80 80 60 64 80 80 60 64 70 76 46 68 70 76 46 56 50 58 24 28 50 58 24 28 22 26
B10 1.5 mm2 20 14 20 14 15 11 15 11 13 5 13 6 6
B13 1.5 mm2 30 20 30 20 25 15 25 16 19 9 19 9 8
B16 1.5 mm2 40 30 40 30 35 23 35 23 25 12 25 12 11
B20 2.5 mm2 40 32 40 32 38 34 38 28 29 14 29 14 13
Chapter 7 / 21
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for high-pressure lamps – Maximum recommended number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Conventional ballasts for metal halide lamps, uncompensated Lamp values W A 35 0.53 70 0.98 150 1.8 250 3 400 3.5* 400 4.4**
Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25 11 18 23 29 9 15 18 23 7 11 14 17 5 8 9 12 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 2
* with OGLI 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 3.5 A ** with OGLS 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 4.4 A
Conventional ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps, uncompensated Lamp values W A 50 0.77 70 1 100 1.2 150 1.8 250 3 400 4.4
Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 9 14 18 22 6 10 13 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 6 9 11 14 4 6 8 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 1 2
B25 16 12 10 7 4 2
Conventional ballasts for high-pressure mercury vapour lamps, uncompensated
22 / Chapter 7
Number of ballasts per automatic C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 10 15 18 23 8 6 9 11 14 6 4 7 7 9 4 2 3 3 4 2 1 2 2 2 1 – 1 1 1 –
circuit breaker B16 B20 B25 13 16 20 10 12 15 7 9 10 3 4 5 2 3 3 1 1 1
The Lighting Handbook
Lamp values W A 50 0.6 80 0.8 125 1.15 250 2.15 400 3.25 700 5.4
Conventional ballasts for metal halide lamps, compensated Lamp values W A 35 0.53 70 0.98 150 1.8 250 3 400 3.5* 400 4.4**
ComNumber of ballasts per automatic pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 6 22 36 45 50 11 12 12 18 23 29 8 20 7 11 14 17 5 32 5 7 9 11 3 35 3 5 7 8 2 45 3 4 5 7 2
circuit breaker B16 18 13 8 5 4 3
B20 23 16 10 6 5 4
B25 27 20 12 8 6 5
* with OGLI 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 3.5 A ** with OGLS 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 4.4 A
Conventional ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps, compensated Lamp values W A 50 0.77 70 1 100 1.2 150 1.8 250 3 400 4.4
ComNumber of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 10 16 24 31 38 11 17 22 12 12 18 23 29 8 13 16 12 10 16 20 25 7 11 14 20 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 36 5 7 9 11 3 5 6 45 3 4 5 7 2 3 4
B25 27 20 17 12 8 5
Conventional ballasts for high-pressure mercury vapour lamps, compensated Lamp values W A 50 0.6 80 0.8 125 1.15 250 2.15 400 3.25 700 5.4
ComNumber of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25 7 19 31 39 49 10 15 18 23 8 12 19 24 30 6 9 11 14 10 7 12 15 19 4 6 7 9 18 4 6 7 9 2 3 3 4 25 2 4 5 6 1 2 2 2 40 1 2 2 3 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 1 1 1
The Lighting Handbook
All data refer to a rated voltage of 230 V 50 Hz.
Chapter 7 / 23
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps – Maximum recommended number of transformers per automatic circuit breaker Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.ATCO TMBx/OMTx series) Power 20 W 35 W 50 W 70 W 80 W 105 W 150 W 210 W 300 W
C10 58 41 21 15 14 8 4 2–3 1–2
C16 93 65 35 24 22 13 6 4–5 2–3
B10 29 20 10 7 7 4 2 1 n.r.
B16 46 32 17 12 11 6 3 2 1
n.r. = not recommended
Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.ATCO TMAx/TMDx series) Power 20 W 35 W 40 W 50 W 60 W 70 W 80 W 105 W
C10 42 35 26 23 21 16 13 9
C16 67 56 43 37 33 26 21 14
B10 21 17 13 11 10 8 6 4
B16 33 28 21 18 16 13 10 7
Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.ATCO OGT series) Power 250 W 300 W 500 W
C10 3–4 2 1
C16 5–6 3–4 1–2
B10 1–2 1 n.r.
B16 2–3 1–2 n.r.
n.r. = not recommended
24 / Chapter 7
The Lighting Handbook
Because of the high starting current of halogen incandescent lamps, we recommend to use automatic circuit breakers with C characteristics.
Low-voltage installation Service life and luminous flux
Multiplication factor for relative operating values
The service life and luminous flux of low-voltage halogen lamps are extremely voltage dependent. Voltage changes on the line side are transferred to the secondary side in the same ratio. A 1 V overvoltage is insignificant for a 230 W halogen 4 lamp. For a 12 V halogen lamp, 3 however, this represents an 2 overvoltage of 8 % which re1 = duces the average 100% service life of the 0.8 0.6 halogen lamp, e.g. 0.4 from 3,000 hours 0.3 to approx. 1,200 0.2 hours.
50
7
30
6 5
20
Lh
10 8 6
ÇŠ
4 2
1= 100% 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2
ÇŠ
Lh
0.15 60 %
80 %
100 % 120 %
0.1 0.08 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02
140 %
ÇŠ = luminous flux Lh = service life
Voltage as % of nominal voltage
Operation at rated load Magnetic transformers should be operated at rated load as far as possible so as to avoid any rise in the secondary voltage which can result in a reduction in lamp service life (5 % overvoltage corresponds to 30 % shorter life). Conductor cross-sections and voltage drop
The Lighting Handbook
Because the voltages are small, large currents flow on the secondary side. If conductors are long and have small crosssections, this can result in considerable voltage drops. Crosssections must be chosen so that the voltage drop across the conductor between transformer and lamp does not exceed 5 %.
Chapter 7 / 25
Required conductor cross-sections in mm2 as a function of transformer rating and cable length (one-way line length) for magnetic transformers: Transformer rating
up to 2 m up to 4 m 20 VA 1.5 1.5 50 VA 1.5 1.5 1OO VA 1.5 2.5 150 VA 2.5 4 200 VA 4 4
Cable length in m
up to 6 m 1.5 1.5 4 6 6
up to 8 m 1.5 2.5 4 6 10
up to 10 m up to 12 m 1.5 1.5 2.5 4 6 6 10 10 10 16
Installation The distance between transformer and lamps must be as short as possible (minimum distance, however, is approx. 30 cm) in order to avoid the relatively large conductor cross-sections. On the other hand, there is often unwanted humming, especially when lighting is adjusted; therefore the transformer must be installed out of earshot if possible.
Transformer
26 / Chapter 7
The Lighting Handbook
Wherever possible, cables must be laid in a star configuration and be of equal length to ensure that all lamps receive the same voltage.
Transformers and light regulation Only approved safety transformers should be used. The ambient temperature must not exceed 50 °C max. Please note that transformers for use in areas which present fire risks must carry the appropriate conformity mark (e.g. , , , ). Phase control Halogen lamps are operated with a magnetic transformer. Reverse phase control Halogen lamps are operated with an electronic transformer in the high-frequency range. Important: do not exceed maximum conductor length. Safety measures when operating low-voltage halogen lamps Low-voltage halogen lamps generate a huge amount of heat. In the case of recessed luminaires, make sure there is adequate heat removal and that the safety distances from combustible materials are observed. The necessary safety distances from the illuminated surface also apply when using spotlights. These are identified by the following symbol and details of the relevant distance in metres:
The Lighting Handbook
â&#x20AC;Śm
Chapter 7 / 27
Chapter 8
Checklists The five steps of lighting design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checklist according to the five steps of lighting design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance of lighting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF) and lamp survival factor (LSF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF) . . . . . . Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF) . . . Economic efficiency calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Economic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of burning hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refurbishment of lighting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment . . . . . Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 – 11 4 – 11 12 – 19 13 14 – 17 18 19 20 – 23 21 – 22 23 24 – 28 27 – 28 29 – 33
The Lighting Handbook
The five steps of lighting design = help for structuring the lighting design scheme – Determine lighting REQUIREMENTS – SELECT lamps, luminaires and lighting management – Calculate NUMBER of luminaires required – POSITION luminaires and lighting control – ANALYSE the results From experience we know that usually Step 1 = Determine lighting requirements is not taken into account sufficiently. The checklist below should help the user to consider key questions for clarifying basic requirements. Accordingly, requirements are broken down as follows: – General conditions – Lighting quality requirements – visual performance – vista – visual comfort – vitality – empowerment The lighting quality criteria are in line with those set by the EU. ELI (Ergonomic Lighting Indicator) was developed in collaboration with ETH Zurich and TU Ilmenau (Prof. Dr. Schierz). Understanding this task will allow for proper development of a well thought-out lighting solution based on the quality characteristics of lighting (Chapter 1) and project-specific requirements.
The Lighting Handbook
Analysis includes the assessment of lighting quality. In the process, the requirement criteria are taken into account. The formulations for assessment differ from the requirements (ELI assessment). A checklist for workplace analysis (page 11) is provided for easy identification of technical lighting equipment at workplaces, in particular DSE workstations. Chapter 8 / 3
Checklist according to the five steps of lighting design 1. Lighting requirements
Checked ✓
General conditions Utilization of room Size and height of room Ceiling structure Reflection factors Window areas Doors, passageways, circulation areas Multi-task areas Arrangement and material of furniture Protection types (foreign bodies and humidity) Protection classes (electrical installations) Influence by chemicals Fire protection Emergency lighting Energy consumption limits (kWh/year) Maximum power requirement (W/m²) Budget for initial installation Lighting quality requirements (ELI requirements) Criterion A – Visual performance How well should the visual task be recognised? Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance.
At the workstations, … -2 -1 0* 1 2
... visual tasks are the same across the whole area.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... colour distinction is required to a common extent.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... no extraordinary changes of viewing direction occur.
-2 -1 0 1 2
4 / Chapter 8
The Lighting Handbook
... standard visual tasks have to be performed.
Within the visual task area, … ... hard shadows must be avoided.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... the field of vision should be free from sources of glare.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... reflections must be avoided.
-2 -1 0 1 2
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards
Mean value Visual task
Criterion B – Vista How do you want to experience the lighting solution in your environment? Explanation: In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and create a favourable first visual impression of a room.
In the project planned, ... ... the lighting concept should blend in smoothly with the interior design.
1 2 3 4 5
... the lighting concept should be properly geared towards expectations.
1 2 3 4 5
... the lighting concept should facilitate orientation in the room.
1 2 3 4 5
In the project planned, ... ... the first visual impression will be decisive.
1 2 3 4 5
... the perceptible quality of the luminaire will be of major importance.
1 2 3 4 5
... the cleanliness of the room and the lighting will be of major importance.
1 2 3 4 5
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely
Mean value Vista
Criterion C – Visual comfort How much visual comfort is required in the room? Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area, but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance.
In the project planned, ...
The Lighting Handbook
... users must be particularly protected from annoying sources of glare.
-2 -1 0 * 1 2
... it will be particularly important to identify three-dimensional structures in the room.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... the room should provide a bright and inviting impression.
-2 -1 0 1 2
Chapter 8 / 5
... daylight must be taken into account.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... there must be no flickering light.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... larger dark areas should be avoided.
-2 -1 0 1 2
In the area around the visual task, the room should be illuminated uniformly.
-2 -1 0 1 2
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards
Mean value Visual comfort
Criterion D – Vitality How positive should the light’s influence be on people? Explanation: Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of well-being. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes.
The lighting concept… ... should make people feel good.
1 2 3 4 5
... should stimulate people.
1 2 3 4 5
In the project planned, ... ... it should be possible in particular to adjust the lighting to the brightness level required.
1 2 3 4 5
... the effect to be created should be as natural as possible.
1 2 3 4 5
... people’s circadian rhythm should be particularly taken into account.
1 2 3 4 5
In the project planned, special emphasis is put on protection against sources of annoyance or adverse health effects.
1 2 3 4 5
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely
Mean value Vitality
Criterion E – Empowerment To what extent should the lighting adjust to my personal requirements? Explanation: Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence one’s lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs.
... the user should be able to personally influence the lighting situation.
1 2 3 4 5
... a variety of tasks must be taken into account.
1 2 3 4 5
The lighting should be switched automatically.
1 2 3 4 5
The artificial lighting should be controlled by daylight sensors.
1 2 3 4 5
6 / Chapter 8
The Lighting Handbook
In the project planned, ...
The lighting should be controlled on the basis of time.
1 2 3 4 5
Any future layout changes should be taken into account.
1 2 3 4 5
Mean value Empowerment
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely
ELI â&#x20AC;&#x201C; LENI requirements Application: the mean values of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines of the spider chart.
Visual performance
A
2
1 0
E
5
4
-1
3
Empowerment
2
3
1 -2 1 1 2 -2 -1
4 5
3
2
4
5B Vista
0 1 2
D Vitality
C Visual comfort
ELI
60
120
0
180 kWh/m2 a
The Lighting Handbook
LENI Calculation see Chapter 1 / 19
Chapter 8 / 7
2. Selection of lamps, luminaires and lighting management
Checked ✓
Lamp type Luminaire range and model Lighting management range and modules 3. Calculate number of luminaires required Rough calculation (Quickplan/Quickcalc) Detailed calculation (Dialux/Relux) Planning conditions (maintenance, reflection) 4. Positioning of luminaires and lighting control Positioning the luminaires – structural situation – orientation (avoid reflections and glare) – spacings between luminaires (regular patterns) – peripheries – alignment techn. infrastructure (distribution cabinet, clamping compartment, …) Position of control gear Emergency lighting 5. Analysis of results Lighting quality analysis (ELI assessment) Criterion A – Visual performance How well can the visual task be recognised? Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance.
In the main visual task area, the lighting … -2 -1 0 * 1 2
... provides uniformity of illuminance.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... complies with the colour rendition index.
-2 -1 0 1 2
8 / Chapter 8
The Lighting Handbook
... complies with the maintenance value of illuminance.
-2 -1 0 1 2
In the area around the visual task, the illuminance level required is achieved. In the lighting installation as it exists at present, … ... annoying hard shadows,
-2 -1 0 1 2
... irritating direct glare
-2 -1 0 1 2
... and annoying reflections are avoided.
-2 -1 0 1 2
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards
Mean value Visual task
Please note: EN 12464 specifies standard values; values may be lower only if visual tasks are modified. Where there are several task areas, calculate and assess the mean value for all of them.
Criterion B – Vista How do you experience the lighting solution in your environment? Explanation: In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and create a favourable first visual impression of a room.
The lighting concept … ... enhances interior design features.
1 2 3 4 5
... fulfils my personal expectations.
1 2 3 4 5
... takes passageways, circulation areas and activity zones into consideration.
1 2 3 4 5
... creates a hierarchy of perception (lighting focuses).
1 2 3 4 5
The luminaires make a high-quality impression.
1 2 3 4 5
The luminaires are neither soiled nor affected by other foreign substances.
1 2 3 4 5
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely
Mean value Vista
Criterion C – Visual comfort How much visual comfort is provided in the room? Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area, but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance. -2 -1 0 * 1 2
The Lighting Handbook
The lighting solution produces no glare (UGR). The lighting components are balanced and matched to the room.
-2 -1 0 1 2
The ceiling and walls are pleasantly bright.
-2 -1 0 1 2
Chapter 8 / 9
The lighting solution … ... takes daylight into account and uses it.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... does not flicker.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... does not allow major dark areas in the room.
-2 -1 0 1 2
The task area environment is uniformly illuminated.
-2 -1 0 1 2
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards
Mean value Visual comfort
Criterion D – Vitality How positive is the light’s influence on the people? Explanation: Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of well-being. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes.
The lighting … ... is one of the factors that make me feel good.
1 2 3 4 5
... has a stimulating effect.
1 2 3 4 5
... adjusts to the brightness level required.
1 2 3 4 5
The lighting creates a natural, pleasant effect.
1 2 3 4 5
The lighting stabilises/enhances the users’ circadian rhythm.
1 2 3 4 5
There are no sources of annoyance or adverse health effects.
1 2 3 4 5
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely
Mean value Vitality
Criterion E – Empowerment To what extent does the lighting adjust to my personal requirements? Explanation: Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence one’s lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs. 1 2 3 4 5
A variety of lighting scenes can be called up.
1 2 3 4 5
Presence detectors make sure that the lighting switches automatically.
1 2 3 4 5
Thanks to daylight sensors, the artificial lighting adjusts to daylight changes over the course of the day.
1 2 3 4 5
Automated, dynamic scenes are available.
1 2 3 4 5
10 / Chapter 8
The Lighting Handbook
The installation can be switched or dimmed.
Luminaires and switches can be rearranged flexibly.
1 2 3 4 5
The luminaires are arranged so as to allow for flexible change in room utilisation without major effort.
1 2 3 4 5
Mean value Empowerment
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely
ELI â&#x20AC;&#x201C; LENI assessments Application: the mean values of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines of the spider chart. Visual performance
A
2
1 0
E
5
4
-1
3
Empowerment
2
3
1 -2 1 1 2 -2 -1
4 5
3
2
4
5B Vista
0 1 2
D Vitality
C Visual comfort
ELI 60
120
0
180 kWh/m2 a
LENI Calculation see Chapter 1 / 19 Other analyses Situation regarding standards The Lighting Handbook
Economic efficiency Budget Documentation Methods of presentation Chapter 8 / 11
Maintenance of lighting systems Today, the maintenance of lighting installations is a decisive factor in an installation’s balance of costs. According to the formula below (1), a lighting level required of Em = 500 lx at a standard maintenance factor of MF = 0.67 implies a new illuminance level of Enew = 750 lx. Em: maintained illuminance = maintenance value of illuminance (1) Em = Enew x MF (maintenance factor) Benefit of a high MF: – lower luminaire investment costs – reduced energy costs
Benefit of a low MF: – low maintenance costs – longer maintenance intervals
Please note: at a lower maintenance factor, illuminance may be constantly dimmed to the maintenance value to save energy (maintenance control). The maintenance factor includes 4 components: (2) MF = LLMF x LSF x LMF x RMF All these factors describe the decrease in illuminance. The maximum in each case is 1, corresponding to the new value. At the respective time of maintenance, the various causes of the decrease in illuminance must be identified. Maintenance factor components Causes of illuminance decrease
Ageing of lamps Failure of lamps Soiling of luminaire Soiling of room
➝
➝
➝
Options for improving the maintenance factor: – Lamp replacement already before the lamp service life ends (LLWF/LSF ) – Immediate replacement of lamps in case of failure (LSF = 1) – Use of closed luminaires (LWF7 ) – More frequent room cleaning (RWF7 ) 12 / Chapter 8
The Lighting Handbook
Lamp luminous flux mainten. factor LLMF Lamp survival factor LSF Luminaire maintenance factor LMF Room maintenance factor RMF
160 % 140 % 120 % 100 %
Example: Luminaire maintenance: every year Room surface maintenance: every 3 years Lamp replacement: every 3 years Faulty lamp replacement: immediately
80 % 60 % 40 %
= Enew = Em
20 % 0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5 2.0 years
2.5
3.0
3.5
Environmental conditions In case you are not familiar with the application, the following standard values apply; however, the tables below will help you calculate the accurate maintenance factor according to formula (2). Ambient condition
Maintenance Working interval areas recommended Clean-rooms, data 3 years centres, assembly workstations for electronic components
Reference maintenance factor 0.80
Clean
3 years
Offices, schools
0.67
Normal
2 years
Shops, laboratories, restaurants, warehouses, assembly bays
0.57
Soiled
1 year
Steel works, chemical plants, foundries, welding shops, grinding shops, wood processing
0.50
The Lighting Handbook
Very Clean
According to CIE – volume 97, “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”, at 2005
Chapter 8 / 13
14 / Chapter 8
The Lighting Handbook
Incandescent lamp CIE97:2005 Halogen incandescent lamp CIE97:2005 T26 (low-loss ballast) single-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T26 (low-loss ballast) triple-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T26 (electronic ballast) triple-band fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005/CIE97:2005 T26 (el. ball.) triple-band fluor. lamp, long-life Philips MASTER TL-D Xtreme (long life) T26 (el. ball.) triple-band fluor. lamp, long-life AURA Ultimate LL (long life) T16 (electronic ballast) triple-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T16 (el. ball.) triple-band fluor. lamp, long-life AURA SUPREME T5 HO LL (long life)
Lamps
LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF
Burning hours 100 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 14,000 16,000 18,000 20,000 22,000 24,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 45,000 1.00 0.97 0.93 1.00 0.98 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.97 0.95 1.00 1.00 0.78 0.50 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.89 0.82 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.72 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.90 0.78 0.60 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.83 0.60 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.90 0.75 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.90 0.70 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.89 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.91 0.80 0.50 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.89 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98
Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF)
LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF
1.00 0.98 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.85 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.94 0.86 0.50 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.78 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.81 0.60 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.93 0.87 0.84 0.82 0.80 0.79 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.93 0.76 0.55 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.92 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.79 0.78 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.91 0.80 0.60 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.92 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.95 0.86 0.62 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.94 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.89 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.96 0.95 0.90 0.75 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.94 0.92 0.89 0.88 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.77 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.94
Values acc. to specifications by lamp manufacturers, January 2008, acc. to CIE97:2005 Technical report “Guide on the Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems” 2nd edition, and ZVEI publication “Service life behaviour of discharge lamps for lighting” of November 2005. For data of lamps by other manufacturers or other lamp types, please contact the respective manufacturer directly. The use of state-of-the-art ballast technology is a prerequisite. The switching frequency has a major influence on lamp survival. Most data are based on the standardised 3-hour switching rhythm acc. to IEC (2.75 h ON, 0.25 h OFF).
Compact fluorescent lamp CIE97:2005 TC-S, TC-D, TC-T 5-26W (low-loss ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-SEL, TC-TEL 5-42W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-DEL 10-26W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-L 18-36W (low-loss ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-L 18-80W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 Induction lamp Philips QL
The Lighting Handbook
and lamp survival factor (LSF)
Chapter 8 / 15
16 / Chapter 8
The Lighting Handbook
Metal halide lamp Ceramic (50-150W) CIE97:2005 Metal halide lamp Ceramic Philips CDM-T 70W/Elite Metal halide lamp Ceramic Osram HCI-T 150W/WDL PB Metal halide lamp Ceramic Osram HCI 250W PB Metal halide lamp Quartz (250/400W) CIE97:2005 Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-E 250W/D Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-E 400W/D Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-BT 400W/N Metal halide lamp Quartz Philips HPI-T Plus 250/400W
Lamps
LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF
Burning hours 100 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 14,000 16,000 18,000 20,000 22,000 24,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 45,000 1.00 0.95 0.87 0.75 0.72 0.68 0.64 0.60 0.56 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.95 0.80 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.85 0.81 0.80 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.90 0.50 1.00 0.93 0.88 0.87 0.86 0.80 0.77 0.73 0.71 0.69 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.88 0.70 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.87 0.84 0.81 0.80 0.75 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.85 0.75 0.62 1.00 0.98 0.95 0.90 0.87 0.83 0.79 0.65 0.63 0.60 0.56 0.53 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.92 0.86 0.80 0.73 0.68 0.63 0.55 0.50 0.99 0.98 0.92 0.88 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.70 0.69 0.65 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.79 0.70 0.61 1.00 0.97 0.93 0.88 0.85 0.80 0.78 0.74 0.71 0.69 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.79 0.70 0.61 1.00 0.97 0.92 0.87 0.83 0.77 0.73 0.72 0.70 0.69 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.79 0.70 0.61 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.71 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.93 0.89 0.84 0.75 0.66 0.59 0.50
Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF)
1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.91 0.87 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.77 0.75 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.94 0.91 0.84 0.77 0.63 0.50 1.00 0.98 0.94 0.91 0.87 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.71 0.70 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.88 0.83 0.72 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.86 0.85 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.89 0.84 0.79 0.72 0.63 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.87 0.87
LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.81 0.73 LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.90 0.89 LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.88 0.86 0.82 0.77 0.55 0.43
LSF 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.84 0.79 0.70 LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90
LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF
Values acc. to specifications by lamp manufacturers, January 2008, acc. to CIE97:2005 Technical report “Guide on the Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems” 2nd edition, and ZVEI publication “Service life behaviour of discharge lamps for lighting” of November 2005. For data of lamps by other manufacturers or other lamp types, please contact the respective manufacturer directly. The use of state-of-the-art ballast technology is a prerequisite. The switching frequency has a major influence on lamp survival. Most data are based on the standardised 3-hour switching rhythm acc. to IEC (2.75 h ON, 0.25 h OFF).
High-pressure mercury-vapour lamp 50–1,000W ZVEI 2005 Mercury vapour lamp Philips HPL-N 50-400W Sodium vapour lamp 50/70W ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp 150–400W (standard luminous flux) ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp 150–400W (higher luminous flux) ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp Philips SON(-T) PIA Plus 100–400W
The Lighting Handbook
and lamp survival factor (LSF)
Chapter 8 / 17
V SS
1.0 S N V SS
1.5 S N
2.0 V SS S N
2.5 V SS S N V SS
3.0 S N
V
0.94 0.92 0.87 0.83 0.94 0.88 0.82 0.77 0.93 0.85 0.79 0.73 0.91 0.83 0.77 0.71 0.90 0.81 0.75 0.68 0.89 0.79 0.73 0.65
0.94 0.96 0.93 0.91 0.96 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.92 0.92 0.88 0.83 0.93 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.92 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.92 0.90 0.84 0.79
Enclosed IP2X
Dust-proof IP5X
Indirect luminaires 0.94 0.92 0.89 0.85 0.93 0.86 0.81 0.74 0.91 0.81 0.73 0.65 0.77 0.88 0.66 0.57 0.86 0.73 0.60 0.51 0.85 0.70 0.55 0.45 From CIE publication 97 â&#x20AC;&#x153;Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systemsâ&#x20AC;?, dated 2005, ISBN 3 900 734 34 8 Ambient conditions: SS = very clean (sehr sauber), S = clean (sauber), N = normal, V = soiled (verschmutzt)
0.95 0.93 0.89 0.83 0.94 0.89 0.81 0.72 0.93 0.84 0.74 0.64 0.91 0.80 0.69 0.59 0.89 0.77 0.64 0.54 0.87 0.74 0.61 0.52
Reflector enclosed above (no self-cleaning effect)
0.98 0.95 0.92 0.88 0.96 0.93 0.89 0.83 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.80 0.94 0.89 0.84 0.78 0.93 0.87 0.82 0.75 0.92 0.85 0.79 0.73
0.5 SS S N
0.96 0.95 0.91 0.88 0.95 0.90 0.86 0.83 0.94 0.87 0.83 0.79 0.92 0.84 0.80 0.75 0.91 0.82 0.76 0.71 0.89 0.79 0.74 0.68
The Lighting Handbook
18 / Chapter 8
Reflector exposed above (self-cleaning effect)
Luminaire cleaning interval in years Environment type Luminaire type Bare batten luminaires
Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF)
Room cleaning interval in years 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 Illumina- Environment tion type type Direct SS 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 S 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 N 1.00 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 V 1.00 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 Direct/ SS 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 Indirect S 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 N 1.00 0.87 0.84 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 V 1.00 0.77 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 Indirect SS 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 S 1.00 0.89 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 N 1.00 0.77 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 V 1.00 0.60 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 From CIE publication 97 â&#x20AC;&#x153;Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systemsâ&#x20AC;?, dated 2005, ISBN 3 900 734 34 8 The figures in the table above apply to reflection factors 70/50/20 and a medium-sized room (k = 2.5) Ambient conditions: SS = very clean (sehr sauber), S = clean (sauber), N = normal, V = soiled (verschmutzt)
The Lighting Handbook
5.5
0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55
5.0
0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55
0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55
6.0
Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF)
Chapter 8 / 19
Economic efficiency calculation A short pay-back period is usually the most important consideration when designing lighting systems. The pay-back period calculation using the following forms is based on a static calculation method. This is a theoretical approach that delivers a guide value very quickly and is perfectly adequate for an initial estimate. Dynamic calculation models involving depreciation and interest payments are left to the financial experts and fall outside the scope of this handbook. Static calculation model Extra expenditure investment costs Annual saving in operating costs
Definition of terms used in the economic analysis sheets (3) System power of luminaire Lamp wattage + power dissipation in control gear. (5) Annual burning hours Total of the daily lamp ON hours over the year. The table of burning hours (Chap. 8/25) provides help for daylight-based systems. (9) Maintenance factor A reference maintenance factor of 0.67 can be assumed (3-year maintenance interval, clean environment), e.g. office; see Chap. 8/15). The maintenance value can be determined precisely on the basis of the details included in the previous chapter â&#x20AC;&#x153;Maintenance of lighting installationsâ&#x20AC;?. The lighting calculation cannot be made until the maintenance factor has been determined. The maintenance factor plus the general conditions have to be documented in the design process. (14) Cost of lamp replacement Cost of the complete job of replacing the lamps, including the costs of the lamp and additional costs such as step ladders, weekend overtime payments or loss of production. (15) Cost of luminaire cleaning Cost of the complete job of cleaning the luminaire plus replacing faulty components in the lighting system including parts costs. (16) Cost of room cleaning Labour costs for cleaning room surfaces and restoring the reflection characteristics to their new condition. (17) Energy costs per kWh Estimate a mixed price for high and low tariff. Include energy standing charges in the working price.
20 / Chapter 8
The Lighting Handbook
Pay-back time =
Economic analysis Building project
Option 1 Luminaire type
Option 2
(1)
Luminaire data Number of lamps per luminaire
(2)
System power of luminaire (W)
(3)
Operating data Service life of system (y)
(4)
Annual burning hours see Chap. 8/25
(5)
Lamp replacement interval (y)
(6)
Luminaire cleaning interval (y)
(7)
Room cleaning interval (y)
(8)
Number of luminaires Maintenance factor Number of luminaires
(9) (10)
The Lighting Handbook
Itemised investment costs Cost of one luminaire
(11)
Cost of one lamp
(12)
Installation costs per luminaire
(13)
Chapter 8 / 21
Option 1
Option 2
Itemised operating costs Cost of lamp replacement
(14)
Cost of luminaire cleaning
(15)
Cost of room cleaning
(16)
Energy costs per kWh
(17)
Investment costs Luminaire costs (10) x (11)
(18)
Lamp costs (10) x (2) x (12)
(19)
Installation costs (10) x (13)
(20)
Investment costs (18) + (19) + (20)
(21)
Lamp replacement costs (14) x (4) Ⲑ (6)
(22)
Luminaire cleaning costs (15) x (4) Ⲑ (7)
(23)
Room cleaning costs (16) x (4) Ⲑ (8)
(24)
Energy costs (10) x (3) x (4) x (5) x (17) ⫼ 1000
(25)
Operating costs (22) + (23) + (24) + (25)
(26)
Annual operating costs (26) ⫼ (4)
(27)
Pay-back period* =
(21) Option 2 – (21) Option 1 (27) Option 1 – (27) Option 2
Pay-back period* = * excludes depreciation and interest
22 / Chapter 8
– –
=
years
=
years The Lighting Handbook
Operating costs
310 310
310 310
258 258
24-h shift working, Process monitoring/control
Double shift, 6 days/week
Single shift, 6 days/week
Single shift, 5 days/week
10 10
10 10
16 16
Hours/day 24 24
No Yes
No Yes
No Yes
No Yes
Daylight-based control
From CIE publication 97 â&#x20AC;&#x153;Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systemsâ&#x20AC;?, dated 2005
Daylight-based control: the lamps switch on automatically when there is too little daylight available. Data is based on the assumption that there is sufficient available daylight for half the year.
On period Days in use/year 365 365
Working mode/shift type
The Lighting Handbook
2,580 1,550
3,100 1,760
4,960 3,720
Burning hours per lamp and year in hours 8,760 7,300
Table of burning hours
Chapter 8 / 23
Refurbishment of lighting systems The following list provides clues for discussion with the customer. The potentialities stated draw a comparison between contemporary lighting solution options available today with the technology approx. 15 years ago. In a project, viable savings must be accurately calculated in the design stage. The savings apply only on a case-by-case basis. If several measures are taken, they will complement each other without the levels adding up. 1. Saving energy, CO2 and costs
1. Advanced materials Today’s reflectors and innovative surface finishes provide for more efficient luminaires (e.g. PSP+). 2. Use of daylight The Luxmate daylight-based lighting control system provides for high energy savings where sufficient daylight is available. 3. Improvement of lamps and control gear Innovations in the electronic control of lamps, optimised temperatures and improvements of the lamps’ physical properties provide for extensive savings. 4. Taking ageing into account The balance between the new value and minimum illuminance can be saved by dimmable control (Maintenance Control). 5. Taking room utilisation into account Using presence detectors or a time-based control system, the lighting can be adjusted more properly to the time/s of use.
24 / Chapter 8
Potential savings up to –30 %
up to –60 %
up to –40 %
up to –17 %
up to –25 %
The Lighting Handbook
Pros
2. Improved ergonomic compatibility
➝ ➝ ➝
1. Increased productivity According to various studies, people’s productivity can be significantly improved by an upgraded lighting solution (e.g. research by TU Ilmenau, AIF no. 9955). 2. Fewer errors According to various studies, people’s error rate can be minimised by an upgraded lighting solution (e.g. research by TU Ilmenau, AIF no. 9955). 3. Increased alertness The human physiology is decoded step by step, allowing to perfectly adjust the lighting to the individual (e.g. doctoral thesis by Susanne Fleischer, ETH Zürich). 4. Enhanced sense of well-being Pleasant brightness levels and personal control can have a positive impact on people’s sense of well-being (e.g. Light Right Consortium).
Potential savings
➝
Pros
The Lighting Handbook
Please note: It is difficult to provide exact and generally applicable figures; however, measurable increases were achieved in individual cases. Minor increases already result in high economic benefits.
Chapter 8 / 25
3. Improved maintenance conditions (employment of staff for cleaning, maintenance and monitoring) Potential savings up to +50 %
Pros 1. Extension of maintenance cycle Over recent years, the service life of lamps has been significantly extended (e.g. Philips Master TL-D Xtreme, AURA Ultimate LL). 2. Reduction in maintenance costs up to –30 % Contemporary luminaires frequently come in a closed design, allowing for easy cleaning (e.g. MELLOW LIGHT IV, LIGHTFIELDS, PERLUCE). 3. Automatic monitoring of installations up to –80 % Today, facility management tools allow for automatic, central monitoring of installations (e.g. in emergency lighting/ONLITE). 4. Energy savings up to –20 % Easy cleaning of luminaires, and extension of the maintenance cycle result in a reduced number of luminaires required, and thus energy savings (e.g. TECTON I IP). 4. Additional pros
Pros 1. Improvements in environmental factors Today, WEEE and RoHS provide the basis for manufacturing luminaires. Environmental impact has been reduced (e.g. lead/cadmium). 2. State of the art The latest lighting solutions reflect the state of the art and an improved situation in terms of lighting standards.
The following forms are intended to help you collect all relevant data required for evaluating the situation in terms of existing lighting installations. They provide the basis for comparing technical lighting features and for calculating costs.
26 / Chapter 8
The Lighting Handbook
Collecting data for lighting refurbishment
Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment Project
Contact
Address
Tel Fax
Activities in room
Old system Option 1
Option 2
Luminaire type A Number of luminaires Number of lamps per luminaire Type of ballast System power per luminaire including ballast (W) Illuminance
Luminaire type B Number of luminaires Number of lamps per luminaire Type of ballast System power per luminaire including ballast (W) Illuminance
Total installed load in kW ON period each day (h) Working days per year Annual ON period (h) Power consumption in kWh/a
Annual savings in kWh The Lighting Handbook
Basic power price kW/year Power costs per kWh Annual power costs in kWh
Annual savings Chapter 8 / 27
Room length
Reflection: wall
%
Room width
ceiling
%
Room height
floor
%
u = Emin = Emean
Uniformity Emean =
lx
Emin
lx
=
Costs Cleaning per luminaire/year Lamp replacement (incl. lamp)
28 / Chapter 8
Old system Option 1
Option 2
The Lighting Handbook
Room sketch:
After checking, perhaps install new circuit-breaker/fuse Measure voltage at luminaire terminal Fix wiring at input end Use mains fuse to briefly switch off luminaire power, then switch on again Visually check electronic ballasts if there are any burn marks at mains input. Replace all units affected.
Faulty circuit-breaker/mains fuse
Faulty cable leading to luminaire
Ballast power down
With 3~ through-wiring in particular, overvoltages (400 V) may have occurred. – N conductor has been confused with L conductor – directly earthed conductor interrupted – unbalanced load
Luminaire was recently installed but cannot be switched on
Possible solution
Possible cause
Error occurring
1. Fundamental analysis in luminaires with electronic ballast or dimmable electronic ballast:
The Lighting Handbook
Power reset
230 V ± 10 %
Note
Checked ✓
Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires
Chapter 8 / 29
30 / Chapter 8 Power reset
Use mains fuse to briefly switch off luminaire power, then switch on again Check cause: replace lamp/s for working lamp/s from adjacent luminaire. Fit new lamp/s if cause has been confirmed. In multi-lamp luminaires, all lamps have to be replaced (make voltage reset) Check compatibility with ballast. Details on ballast label must conform with details printed on lamp Check by rotating lamp several times to left and right (approx. 180°)
No re-ignition after lamp replacement
Faulty lamp
Wrong lamp
Faulty lampholder contact
Luminaire worked but suddenly cannot be switched on again
The Lighting Handbook
Note
Possible solution
Possible cause
Error occurring
Checked â&#x153;&#x201C;
Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires
Power reset with bus signal
Specified values: DALI: 9 to 15 V = LM: 13 to 15 V = DSI: no power measured
Intermit signal in bus line (B1, B2 or Dali) (disconnect line). Use mains fuse to briefly switch off power. Then reconnect bus line and try to switch luminaire via control gear installed (LM or Dali). Measure power at bus
Ballast power down in LM and/or DALI bus installations
Problems with signal line and/or bus line (faulty bus)
Power reset with switchdim
Use mains fuse to briefly switch off power. Actuate momentary-action switch at switchdim input (switching on/off)
Ballast power down in switchdim installations
Note
Dimmable luminaire already worked but suddenly cannot be switched on again.
Possible solution
Possible cause
Error occurring
2. Additional tests for luminaires with dimmable electronic ballast:
The Lighting Handbook
Checked â&#x153;&#x201C;
Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires
Chapter 8 / 31
32 / Chapter 8 – screw-fasten lamp as deeply as possible – between lamp solder point and cap tab – remove oxidation from lamp solder point, if necessary.
No contact in lampholder thread
After relamping, luminaire does not work any more.
The Lighting Handbook
Possible solution
Possible cause
Error occurring
3. Additional test for HID luminaires (high-pressure lamps such as HIT, HST, etc.): Note
Checked ✓
Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires
Check for heat buildup underneath high Common ceilings or at workplaces with very high temperature range: temperatures. Too low temperatures outside, –15 °C < T < 35 °C or heavy air flow (e.g. air-conditioning system) Do not operate lamps in positions unprovided for In order to achieve an appropriate lighting quality, new lamps should always be operated at 100% for the first 100 hours of operation
Ambient temperature of lamp too low/too high
Cool spot neglected
Increasing migration of dark spots along fluorescent lamp
Poor luminous efficiency/dimming behaviour
Cool Spot
Use high-resistance voltmeter to measure power between phase and earth, and between neutral conductor and earth
Bad earth connection
Bad dimming quality
Connect luminaire earth
No earth connection in luminaires with protection class 1
Note
Lamp start delayed
Possible solution
Possible cause
Error occurring
4. Analysis of partial function of luminaires with electronic ballast (bad lighting quality of fluorescent lamp):
The Lighting Handbook
Checked ✓
Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires
Chapter 8 / 33
Chapter 9
Services Design process and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ELI-LENI Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 VIVALDI – Composing light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Online product information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 – 8 Product data sheets and installation instructions available online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 CAD data in 2D and 3D available online . . . . . . . . . . 8 Online lighting design tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 – 10 ZUMTOBEL Lighting DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Design process and tools Design process: Communication
Requirement
Design
Implementation
Attention to/awareness of concepts and products Determine basic situation; define requirements Blueprint planning Work out a concept Optimise Detailed planning Calculation Documentation Implementation Testing Maintenance
Design tools: Communication
Requirement
Design
The Lighting Handbook
Implementation
Product catalogue, brochures, ads and press work, trade fairs, congresses, events, roadshows, Light Forums ELI-LENI calculator Research projects, studies VIVALDI reference Library Online catalogue, QuickCalc, FluxCalc, system configurators, maintenance factor calculation, LM Energy VIVALDI visualisation, DIALux, Relux, ELI-LENI calculator, efficiency analysis, VIVALDI optimising
Chapter 9 / 3
ELI-LENI calculator Award your lighting solution a quality seal. The ELI-LENI calculator calculates energy consumption in a straightforward manner based on the provisions of EN 15193 (LENI). The five descriptive quality criteria of any lighting solution (visual performance, vista, visual comfort, vitality and empowerment) are evaluated within only a few minutes by means of a questionnaire (ELI).
4 / Chapter 9
The Lighting Handbook
Further information and downloads at: www.zumtobel.com/humanergybalance
VIVALDI – Composing light The innovative software for Humanergy Balance lighting concepts makes energy efficiency and lighting quality visible and measurable. – Optimised lighting solutions offering a balance between energy and ergonomics – Interactive visual preparation of scene-based lighting concepts – Dynamic visualisation of light including measurement of energy consumption as well as CO2 quantity – Supports the design process in combination with lighting control technologies such as LUXMATE EMOTION – Interactive visualisation of light colour and coloured light, light quantity, direction of light (directional, diffuse) in room settings – Project source data available from standard lighting design software such as DIALux and Relux
The Lighting Handbook
Further information and downloads at: www.zumtobel.com/vivaldi
Chapter 9 / 5
Online product information Under the “Download” tab, the online catalogue provides a list of all product specifications available for a certain product.
Product information available: – Photometric data sheets inc. UGR tables and maintenance factors – Data formats Eulumdat, IES – CAD data: 2D and 3D – Drag & drop data package for DIALux and Relux – Brochures – Installation instructions – CE certificates
6 / Chapter 9
The Lighting Handbook
Quick access with URL/article reference: www.zumtobel.com/60710147
Product data sheets and installation instructions available online Any product information required can be selected from the online catalogue and summarised in the form of a data sheet. Additionally, all installation instructions for the respective product are available in PDF format.
The Lighting Handbook
– Complete product information in PDF format, up to date and country-specific: figures, charts, images – Compilation of the product information selected in the form of a data sheet (ZIP file) – Photometric data sheets – Data sheets with connecting instructions for LUXMATE products – Quick dispatch of any part of the catalogue by e-mail
Chapter 9 / 7
CAD data in 2D and 3D available online The 2D and 3D data for ZUMTOBEL products can be downloaded free of charge in various formats, e.g. dxf, Rhino, Lightscape, 3D Studio Max etc. – Quick selection of the required symbol – 2D luminaire symbols for AutoCAD as library and in DXF format – 3D luminaires for various CAD systems – Special data sheets with connecting instructions for LUXMATE products – Available formats: DXF, Rhino, Lightscape, 3D Studio Max
8 / Chapter 9
The Lighting Handbook
Just take a look at: www.zumtobel.com/download
Online lighting design tools QuickCalc online: QuickCalc provides for a quick, approximate determination of the number of luminaires required to achieve a defined illuminance level according to the light output ratio method – or vice versa: to determine the illuminance level of a defined number of luminaires.
The Lighting Handbook
In the ZUMTOBEL online catalogue, QuickCalc is available under the “QuickCalc” tab for products with calculation data.
Chapter 9 / 9
FluxCalc online (calculation of luminous flux): Using FluxCalc, the luminous flux of T16 and T26 lamps in relation to ambient temperature can be determined. For T16 lamps, FluxCalc also includes the influence of ZUMTOBEL’s “Cool Spot Optimizer” in the calculation.
ZUMTOBEL Lighting DVD
10 / Chapter 9
The Lighting Handbook
ZUMTOBEL data plug-in for DIALux and Relux with all available product data (Product Explorer – with QuickCalc and maintenance factor calculation), updated versions of DIALux and Relux as well as further tools: LUXMATE Energy Light, ZX2 configurator, ELI/LENI calculator and VIVALDI demo version.
The Lighting Handbook
Personal Notes
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
The Lighting Handbook
Personal Notes
The Lighting Handbook
Personal Notes
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
The Lighting Handbook
Personal Notes
The Lighting Handbook
Personal Notes
Chapter 10
United Kingdom Zumtobel Lighting Ltd. Unit 4 - The Argent Centre, Pump Lane London Hayes/Middlesex UB3 3BL T +44/(0)20 8589 1800 F +44/(0)20 8756 4800 M enquiriesuk@zumtobel.com www.zumtobel.co.uk
Hong Kong Zumtobel Lighting Hong Kong Unit 319, Level 43, Tower 1, Metroplaza, 223 Hing Fong Road, Kwai Chung, N.T. T +852/(0)2503 0466 F +852/(0)2503 0177 M admin@zumtobel.com.hk
United Arab Emirates Zumtobel Lighting GmbH USA and Canada Dubai Airport Free Zone, Zumtobel Lighting Inc. 3rd East Wing, 4th Floor, Location Highland Office 413 3300 Route 9W Highland, New York 1258-2630 PO Box 54620 Dubai T +1/(0)845/691 62 62 T +971/(4) 214 9845 F +1/(0)845/691 62 89 F +971/(4) 214 9501 www.zumtobel.us www.zumtobel.ca Norway Zumtobel Belysning Australia and New Zealand Pilestredet 75 C Zumtobel Lighting Pty Ltd 0354 Oslo 333 Pacific Highway Postbox 5829 Majorstuen North Sydney, NSW 2060 0308 Oslo T +61/(2)8913 5000 T +47/22 46 85 00 F +61/(2)8913 5001 F +47/22 46 85 02 M info@zumtobel.com.au M info.se@zumtobel.com www.zumtobel.com.au China Zumtobel Lighting China Beijing Office T5-2-152 Tayuan Diplomatic Compound No. 1 Xin Dong Road, Chaoyang District 100600 Beijing T +86/(10) 8532 3886 F +86/(10) 8532 3889 M admin@zumtobel.com.hk
Sweden Zumtobel Belysning Birger Jarlsgatan 57 113 56 Stockholm T +46/(0)8/26 26 50 F +46/(0)8/26 56 05 M info.se@zumtobel.com www.zumtobel.se
Denmark Light Makers AS Indiavej 1 2100 Copenhagen T +45/(0)35 43 70 00 F +45/(0)35 43 54 54 M ralf.ritter@lightmakers.dk www.lightmakers.dk
Slovenia and Croatia Zumtobel Licht d.o.o. Dunajska cesta 159 1000 Ljubljana T +386/(1) 56 09 820 F +386/(1) 56 09 866 M bzslowenien@zumtobel.si www.zumtobel.si
Czech Republic and Slovak Republic Zumtobel Lighting s.r.o. Vlastislavova 11 Praha 4 140 00 Praha T +420/(2) 41 740 301 F +420/(2) 41 740 308 M praha@zumtobel.com www.zumtobel.cz
Headquarters Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Schweizer Strasse 30 Postfach 72 6851 Dornbirn, AUSTRIA T +43/(0)5572/390-0 F +43/(0)5572/22 826
Zumtobel Licht GmbH Grevenmarschstrasse 74-78 32657 Lemgo, GERMANY T +49/(0)5261/2 12-0 Poland Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Sp.z.o.o. F +49/(0)5261/2 12-7777 www.zumtobel.de Przedstawicielstwo w Polsce ul. Narbutta 46/48 www.zumtobel.com 02-541 Warszawa T +48/(22) 856 7431 F +48/(22) 856 7432 www.zumtobel.pl Russia Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Official Representative Office Skakovaya Str. 17 Bld. No 1, Office 1104 125040 Moscow T +7/(495) 945 36 33 F +7/(495) 945 16 94 www.zumtobel.ru
Art.-No. 04 797 525-UK 12/08 Š Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Technical data was correct at time of going to press. We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice. Please contact your local sales office for further information. Printed on environmentally-friendly chlorine-free paper.